0% found this document useful (0 votes)

316 views

Programming Manual II Fx1s2

FX Series Programmable Controllers Applied Instructions 5 Introduction Basic Program Instructions STL Programming Devices in Detail Applied Instructions Diagnostic Devices Instruction Execution Times PLC Device Tables Assigning System Devices Points of Technique index.

Uploaded by

chaubinhkhang110686

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

316 views

Programming Manual II Fx1s2

Uploaded by

chaubinhkhang110686

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 224

FX Series Programmable Controllers

Applied Instructions 5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Introduction Basic Program Instructions STL Programming Devices in Detail Applied Instructions Diagnostic Devices Instruction Execution Times PLC Device Tables Assigning System Devices Points of Technique Index

FX Series Programmable Controllers

Applied Instructions 5

Chapter Contents 5. Applied Instructions ...............................................................................5-1

5.1
5.1.1 5.1.3 5.1.5 5.1.7 5.2.1 5.2.3 5.2.5 5.2.7 5.2.9 5.3.1 5.3.3 5.3.5 5.3.7 5.3.9 5.4.1 5.4.3 5.4.5 5.4.7 5.4.9 5.5.1 5.5.3 5.5.5 5.5.7 5.5.9 5.6.1 5.6.3 5.6.5 5.6.7 5.6.9

Program Flow-Functions00 to 09 ..................................................................................... 5-4

CJ (FNC 00) ........................................................... 5-5 SRET (FNC 02)...................................................... 5-8 FEND (FNC 06)...................................................... 5-11 FOR, NEXT (FNC 08, 09) ...................................... 5-13 CMP (FNC 10) ................................................ 5-17 MOV (FNC 12) ................................................ 5-18 CML (FNC 14)................................................. 5-19 FMOV (FNC 16) .............................................. 5-21 BCD (FNC18).................................................. 5-22 5.1.2 5.1.4 5.1.6

CALL (FNC 01).......................................... 5-7 IRET, EI, DI (FNC 03, 04, 05).................... 5-9 WDT (FNC 07)........................................... 5-12

5.2

Move And Compare - Functions 10 to 19....................................................................... 5-16

5.2.2 5.2.4 5.2.6 5.2.8 5.2.10 5.3.2 5.3.4 5.3.6 5.3.8 5.3.10

ZCP (FNC 11)............................................ 5-17 SMOV (FNC 13) ........................................ 5-18 BMOV (FNC 15) ....................................... 5-20 XCH (FNC 17) ........................................... 5-21 BIN (FNC 19)............................................. 5-22 SUB (FNC 21) .......................................... 5-26 DIV (FNC 23)............................................. 5-28 INC (FNC 24) ............................................ 5-29 WOR (FNC 27) .......................................... 5-30 NEG (FNC 29) .......................................... 5-31 ROR (FNC 31)........................................... 5-35 ROR (FNC 33)........................................... 5-36 ROR (FNC 35)........................................... 5-37 ROR (FNC 37)........................................... 5-38 SFRD (FNC 39) ......................................... 5-40

5.3

Arithmetic And Logical Operations -Functions 20 to 29 ................................................. 5-24

ADD (FNC 20)................................................. 5-25 MUL (FNC 22)................................................. 5-27 INC (FNC 24) ................................................. 5-29 WAND (FNC 26) ............................................. 5-30 WXOR (FNC 28) ............................................. 5-31 ROR (FNC 30) ................................................ 5-35 ROR (FNC 32) ................................................ 5-36 ROR (FNC 34) ................................................ 5-37 ROR (FNC 36) ................................................ 5-38 SFWR (FNC 38).............................................. 5-39

5.4

Rotation And Shift - Functions 30 to 39.......................................................................... 5-34

5.4.2 5.4.4 5.4.6 5.4.8 5.4.10

5.5

Data Operation - Functions 40 to 49 .............................................................................. 5-42

ZRST (FNC 40) ............................................... 5-43 ENCO (FNC 42) .............................................. 5-44 BON (FNC 44)................................................. 5-45 ANS (FNC 46) ................................................. 5-47 SQR (FNC 48)................................................. 5-48 REF (FNC 50) ................................................. 5-53 MTR (FNC 52)................................................. 5-54 HSCR (FNC 54) .............................................. 5-56 SPD (FNC 56) ................................................. 5-60 PWM (FNC 58)................................................ 5-62 5.5.2 5.5.4 5.5.6 5.5.8 5.5.10

ROR (FNC 41)........................................... 5-43 SUM (FNC 43)........................................... 5-45 MEAN (FNC 45) ........................................ 5-46 ANR (FNC 47) ........................................... 5-47 FLT (FNC 49) ............................................ 5-49 REFF (FNC 51) ......................................... 5-53 HSCS (FNC 53)......................................... 5-55 HSZ (FNC 55)............................................ 5-57 PLSY (FNC 57).......................................... 5-61 PLSR (FNC 59) ......................................... 5-63 SER (FNC 61) ........................................... 5-69 INCD (FNC 63) .......................................... 5-71 STMR (FNC 65)......................................... 5-72 RAMP (FNC 67) ........................................ 5-73 SORT (FNC 69)......................................... 5-77

5.6

High Speed Processing - Functions 50 to 59 ................................................................. 5-52

5.6.2 5.6.4 5.6.6 5.6.8 5.6.10

5.7

5.7.1 5.7.3 5.7.5 5.7.7 5.7.9 5.8.1 5.8.3 5.8.5 5.8.7 5.8.9

Handy Instructions - Functions 60 to 69 ......................................................................... 5-66

IST (FNC 60)................................................... 5-67 ABSD (FNC 62)............................................... 5-70 TTMR (FNC 64) .............................................. 5-72 ALT (FNC 66).................................................. 5-73 ROTC (FNC 68) .............................................. 5-75 5.7.2 5.7.4 5.7.6 5.7.8 5.7.10

5.8

External FX I/O Devices - Functions 70 to 79 ................................................................ 5-80

TKY (FNC 70) ................................................. 5-81 DSW (FNC 72) ................................................ 5-83 SEGL (FNC 74)............................................... 5-85 ASC (FNC 76) ................................................. 5-88 FROM (FNC 78).............................................. 5-90 RS (FNC 80) ................................................... 5-95 ASCI (FNC 82) ................................................ 5-98 CCD (FNC 84)............................................... 5-100 VRSD (FNC 86) ............................................ 5-101 ECMP (FNC 110) .......................................... 5-111 EBCD (FNC 118) .......................................... 5-112 EADD (FNC 120) .......................................... 5-113 EMUL (FNC 122) .......................................... 5-114 ESQR (FNC 127) .......................................... 5-115 5.8.2 5.8.4 5.8.6 5.8.8 5.8.10 5.9.2 5.9.4 5.9.6 5.9.8 HKY (FNC 71) ........................................... 5-82 SEGD (FNC 73)......................................... 5-84 ARWS (FNC 75) ........................................ 5-87 PR (FNC 77).............................................. 5-89 TO (FNC 779)............................................ 5-91 PRUN (FNC 81)......................................... 5-96 HEX (FNC 83) ........................................... 5-99 VRRD (FNC 85)....................................... 5-101 PID (FNC 88)........................................... 5-102 EZCP (FNC 111) ..................................... 5-111 EBIN (FNC 119) ...................................... 5-112 EAUB (FNC 121) ..................................... 5-114 EDIV (FNC 123) ...................................... 5-115 INT (FNC 129) ......................................... 5-116

5.9

5.9.1 5.9.3 5.9.5 5.9.7

External FX Serial Devices - Functions 80 to 89 ............................................................ 5-94

5.10 Floating Point 1 & 2 - Functions 110 to 129 ................................................................. 5-110

5.10.1 5.10.3 5.10.5 5.10.7 5.10.9 5.11.1 5.11.3 5.13.1 5.10.2 5.10.4 5.10.6 5.10.8 5.10.10

5.11 Trigonometry - FNC 130 to FNC 139 ........................................................................... 5-118

SIN (FNC 130) .............................................. 5-119 TAN (FNC 132) ............................................. 5-120 SWAP (FNC 147).......................................... 5-123 5.11.2 COS (FNC 131) ....................................... 5-120

5.12 Data Operations 2 - FNC 140 to FNC 149 ................................................................... 5-122 5.13 FX1S & FX1N Positioning Control - Functions 150 to 159 ........................................... 5-126
5.13.1 5.13.3 5.13.5 5.14.1 5.14.3 5.14.5 5.14.7 5.15.1 5.15.3 5.16.1 5.16.3 ABS (FNC 155) ............................................. 5-127 PLSV (FNC 157) ........................................... 5-129 DRVA (FNC 159) .......................................... 5-132 TCMP (FNC 160) .......................................... 5-137 TADD (FNC 162)........................................... 5-139 TRD (FNC 166) ............................................. 5-141 HOUR (FNC 169).......................................... 5-143 GRY (FNC 170)............................................. 5-147 RD3A (FNC 176)........................................... 5-148 5.13.2 5.13.4 ZRN (FNC 156) ....................................... 5-128 DRVI (FNC 158) ...................................... 5-130

5.14 Real Time Clock Control - FNC 160 to FNC 169.......................................................... 5-136
5.14.2 5.14.4 5.14.6 TZCP (FNC 161) ..................................... 5-138 TSUB (FNC 163) ..................................... 5-140 TWR (FNC 167)....................................... 5-142

5.15 Gray Codes - FNC 170 to FNC 179 ............................................................................. 5-146

5.15.2 5.15.4 GBIN (FNC 171) ...................................... 5-147 WR3A (FNC 177) .................................... 5-148

5.16 Inline Comparisons - FNC 220 to FNC 249.................................................................. 5-150

LD compare (FNC 224 to 230)...................... 5-151 OR compare (FNC 240 to 246) ..................... 5-153 5.16.2 AND compare (FNC 232 to 238) ............. 5-152

FX Series Programmable Controllers

Applied Instructions 5

Applied Instructions

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Applied Instructions are the specialist instructions of the FX family of PLCs. They allow the user to perform complex data manipulations, mathematical operations while still being very easy to program and monitor. Each applied instruction has unique mnemonics and special function numbers. Each applied instruction will be expressed using a table similar to that shown below:
Mnemonic CJ FNC 00 (Conditional Jump) Function A method of jumping to an identified pointer position Operands D Valid pointers from the range 0 to 63 Program steps CJ,CJP:3steps Jump pointer PPP:1 step

The table will be found at the beginning of each new instruction description. The area identified as Operands will list the various devices (operands) that can be used with the instruction. Various identification letters will be used to associate each operand with its function, i.e. D- destination, S- source, n, m- number of elements. Additional numeric suffixes will be attached if there are more than one operand with the same function. Not all instructions and conditions apply to all PLCs. Applicable CPUs are identified by the boxes in the top right hand corner of the page. For more detailed instruction variations a second indicator box is used to identify the availability of pulse, single (16 bit) word and double (32 bit) word format and to show any flags that are set by the instruction.
16 BIT OPERATION 32 BIT OPERATION PULSE-P

No modification of the instruction mnemonic is required for 16 bit operation. However, pulse operation requires a P to be added directly after the mnemonic while 32 bit operation requires a D to be added before the mnemonic. This means that if an instruction was being used with both pulse and 32 bit operation it would look like..... DPPPP where PPP was the basic mnemonic. The pulse function allows the associated instruction to be activated on the rising edge of the control input. The instruction is driven ON for the duration of one program scan. Thereafter, while the control input remains ON, the associated instruction is not active. To re-execute the instruction the control input must be turned from OFF to ON again. The FLAGS section identifies any flags that are used by the instruction. Details about the function of the flag are explained in the instructions text.

5-1

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

For instructions that operate continuously, i.e. on every scan of the program the instruction will operate and provide a new, different result, the following identification symbol will be used ( to represent a high speed changing state. Typical instructions covered by this situation have a strong incremental, indexable element to their operation. In most cases the operands of applied instructions can be indexed by a users program. For those operands which cannot be indexed, the symbol ) has been used to signify an operand as being fixed after it has been written. Certain instructions utilize additional data registers and/or status flags for example a math function such as ADD (FNC 20) can identify a zero result, borrow and carry conditions by using preset auxiliary relays, M8020 to M8021 respectively.

5-2

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

Applied Instructions:

FX1S

FX1N FX2N FX2NC

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

FNC 00 - 09

Program Flow Move And Compare

5-4 5-16

FNC 10 - 19

FNC 20 - 29

Arithmetic And Logical Operations (+, -, , )

5-24

FNC 30 - 39

Rotation And Shift Data Operation High Speed Processing Handy Instructions External FX I/O Devices External FX Serial Devices Floating Point 1 & 2 Trigonometry (Floating Point 3) Data Operations 2 Positioning Control Real Time Clock Control Gray Codes Additional Functions In-line Comparisons

5-34 5-42 5-52 5-66 5-80 5-94 5-110 5-118 5-112 5-126 5-136 5-146 5-146 5-150

FNC 40 - 49

FNC 50 - 59

FNC 60 - 69

FNC 70 - 79

FNC 80 - 89

FNC 110-129

FNC 130-139

FNC 140-149

FNC 150-159

FNC 160-169

FNC 170-179

FNC 180-189

FNC 220-249

5-3

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.1

Program Flow-Functions 00 to 09

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Contents: Page CJ CALL SRET IRET EI DI FEND WDT FOR NEXT Conditional jump Call Subroutine Subroutine Return Interrupt Return Enable Interrupt Disable Interrupt First End Watchdog Timer Start of a For/Next Loop End a For/Next Loop FNC 00 FNC 01 FNC 02 FNC 03 FNC 04 FNC 05 FNC 06 FNC 07 FNC 08 FNC 09 5-5 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-9 5-9 5-11 5-12 5-13 5-13

Symbols list: D - Destination device. S - Source device. m, n- Number of active devices, bits or an operational constant. Additional numeric suffixes will be attached if there are more than one operand with the same function e.g. D1, S3 or for lists/tabled devices D3+0, S+9 etc. MSB - Most Significant Bit, sometimes used to indicate the mathematical sign of a number, i.e. positive = 0, and negative = 1. LSB - Least Significant Bit. Instruction modifications: PPP PPPP DPPP An instruction operating in 16 bit mode, where PPP identifies the instruction mnemonic. A 16 bit mode instruction modified to use pulse (single) operation. An instruction modified to operate in 32 bit operation.

DPPPP - A 32 bit mode instruction modified to use pulse (single) operation.

( - A repetitive instruction which will change the destination value on every scan unless
modified by the pulse function.

) - An operand which cannot be indexed, i.e. The addition of V or Z is either invalid or will
have no effect to the value of the operand.

5-4

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.1.1

CJ (FNC 00)

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic CJ FNC 00 (Conditional Jump)

Function Jumps to the identified pointer position

Operands D Valid pointers from the range 0 to 63

Program steps CJ, CJP:3steps Jump pointer P22: 1 step

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Operation:
X20 CJ P9 [D] P9

When the CJ instruction is active it forces the program to jump to an identified program marker. While the jump takes place the intervening pro-gram steps are skipped. This means they are not processed in any way. The resulting effect is to speed up the programs operational scan time.

Points to note: a) Many CJ statements can reference a single pointer. b) Each pointer must have a unique number. Using pointer P63 is equivalent to jumping to the END instruction. c) Any program area which is skipped, will not update output statuses even if the input devices change. For example, the program opposite shows a situation which loads X1 to drive Y1. Assuming X1 is ON and the CJ instruction is activated the load X1, out Y1 is skipped. Now even if X1 is turned OFF Y1 will remain ON while the CJ instruction forces the program to skip to the pointer P0. The reverse situation will also apply, i.e. if X1 is OFF to begin with and the CJ instruction is driven, Y1 will not be turned ON if X1 is turned ON. Once the CJ instruction is deactivated X1 will drive Y1 in the normal manner. This situation applies to all types of outputs, e.g. SET, RST, OUT, Y, M & S devices etc.
P9

X20 X21

CJ CJ

P9 P9

X0 X1 P0 M8000

P0 Y1 Y0 END

d) The CJ instruction can jump to any point within the main program body or after an FEND instruction

5-5

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

e) A CJ instruction can be used to Jump forwards through a program, i.e. towards the END instruction OR it can jump backwards towards step 0. If a backwards jump is used care must be taken not to overrun the watchdog timer setting otherwise the P LC will en ter a n err or situ atio n. Fo r m ore information on the watchdog timer please see page 5-12.

P10 X22 CJ P 10

f) Unconditional jumps can be entered by using special auxiliary coils such as M8000. In this situation while the PLC is in RUN the program will ALWAYS execute the CJ instruction in an unconditional manner.

IMPORTANT: Timers and counters will freeze their current values if they are skipped by a CJ instruction. For example if Y1 in the previous program (see point c) was replaced by T0 K100 and the CJ instruction was driven, the contents of T0 would not change/increase until the CJ instruction is no longer driven, i.e. the current timer value would freeze. High speed counters are the only exception to this situation as they are processed independently of the main program. Using applied instructions: Applied instructions are also skipped if they are programmed between the CJ instruction and the destination pointer. However, The PLSY (FNC 57) and PWM (FNC 58) instructions will operate continuously if they were active before the CJ instruction was driven, otherwise they will be processed, i.e. skipped, as standard applied instructions. Details of using CJ with other program flow instructions Further details can be found on pages 7-12 and 7-13 about the combined use of different

program flow techniques (such as master control, MC etc).

5-6

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.1.2

CALL (FNC 01)

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic CALL FNC 01 (Call subroutine)

Function Executes the subroutine program starting at the identified pointer position

Operands D Valid pointers from the range 0 to 62 Nest levels: 5 including the initial CALL

Program steps CALL, CALLP: 3 step Subroutine pointer PPP: 1 steps

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Operation:
X0 [D] CALL P 10 FEND Subroutine D10 SRET

P10

When the CALL instruction is active it forces the program to run the subroutine associated with the called pointer (area identified as subroutine P10). A CALL instruction must be used in conjunction with FEND (FNC 06) and SRET (FNC 02) instructions. The program jumps to the subroutine pointer (located after an FEND instruction) and processes the contents until an SRET instruction is encountered. This forces the p r o g r a m f l o w b a c k t o t h e l in e o f l a d d e r l o g i c immediately following the original CALL instruction.

Points to note: a) Many CALL statements can reference a single subroutine. b) Each subroutine must have a unique pointer number. Subroutine pointers can be selected from the range P0 to P62. Subroutine pointers and the pointers used for CJ (FNC 00) instructions are NOT allowed to coincide. c) Subroutines are not normally processed as they occur after an FEND instruction. When they are called, care should be taken not to overrun the watchdog timer setting. For more information on watchdog timers please see page 5-12. d) Subroutines can be nested for 5 levels including the initial CALL instruction. As an example the program shown opposite shows a 2 level nest. When X1 is activated the program calls subroutine P11. Within this subroutine is a CALL to a second subroutine P12. When both subroutines P11 and P12 are active simultaneously, they are said to be nested. Once subroutine P12 reaches its SRET instruction it returns the program control to the program step immediately following its original CALL (see ). P11 then completes its operation, and once its SRET instruction is processed the program returns once again to the step following the CALL P11 statement (see ).
X1 2

CALL P 11 FEND

P11 1 CALL P 12 SRET P12 SRET

5-7

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

Special subroutine timers: Because of the chance of intermittent use of the subroutines, if timed functions are required the timers used must be selected from the range T192 to T199 and T246 to T249. Details of using CALL with other program flow instructions Further details can be found on pages 7-12 and 7-13 about the combined use of different program flow techniques (such as master control, MC etc).

5-8

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.1.3

SRET (FNC 02)

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic SRET FNC 02 (Subroutine

return)

Function

Operands D

Program steps SRET: 1 step

Returns operation N/A from a subroutine Automatically returns to the step immediately program following the CALL instruction which activated the subroutine.

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Operation: SRET signifies the end of the current subroutine and returns the program flow to the step immediately following the CALL instruction which activated the closing subroutine. Points to note: a) SRET can only be used with the CALL instruction. b) SRET is always programmed after an FEND instruction - please see the CALL (FNC 01)

instruction for more details.

5-9

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.1.4

IRET, EI, DI (FNC 03, 04, 05)

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic IRET FNC 03 (Interrupt return) EI FNC 04 (Enable interrupts) DI FNC 05 (Disable interrupts) I (Interrupt pointer)

Function Forces the program to return from the active interrupt routine Enables interrupt inputs to be processed

Operands D

Program steps

IRET: N/A Automatically returns to the main program step 1 step which was being processed at the time of the interrupt call. N/A Any interrupt input being activated after an EI instruction and before FEND or DI instructions will be processed immediately unless it has been specifically disabled. EI: 1 step

Disables the processing of interrupt routines

DI: N/A 1 step Any interrupt input being activated after a DI instruction and before an EI instruction will be stored until the next sequential EI instruction is processed. A 3 digit numeric code relating to the interrupt type and operation. IPPP: 1 step

Identifies the beginning of an interrupt routine

General description of an interrupt routine: An interrupt routine is a section of program which is, when triggered, operated immediately interrupting the main program flow. Once the interrupt has been processed the main program flow continues from where it was, just before the interrupt originally occurred. Operation: Interrupts are triggered by different input conditions, sometimes a direct input such as X0 is used other times a timed interval e.g. 30 msec can be used. The availability of different interrupt types and the number operational points for each PLC type are detailed on page 412, Interrupt Pointers. To program and operate interrupt routines requires up to 3 dedicated instructions (those detailed in this section) and an interrupt pointer. Defining an interrupt routine: An interrupt routine is specified between its own unique interrupt pointer and the first occurrence of an IRET instruction. Interrupt routines are ALWAYS programmed after an FEND instruction. The IRET instruction may only be used within interrupt routines.
FEND Interrupt Program I001 I201 IRET Interrupt Program I201 IRET

I001

5-10

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

Controlling interrupt operations: The PLC has a default status of disabling interrupt operation. The EI instruction must be used to activate the interrupt facilities. All interrupts which physically occur during the program scan period from the EI instruction until the FEND or DI instructions will have their associated interrupt routines run. If these interrupts are triggered outside of the enclosed range (EI-FEND or EI-DI, see diagram below) they will be stored until the EI instruction is processed on the following scan. At this point the interrupt routine will be run.
EI Enabled Interrupts EI Enabled Interrupts FEND routine IRET Disabled Interrupts I301 FEND routine IRET DI

Disabled Interrupts

I101

Interrupt

If an individual interrupt is to be disabled its associated special M coil must be driven ON. While this coil is ON the interrupt routine will not be activated. For details about the disabling M coils see the PLC device tables in chapter 8. Nesting interrupts: Interrupts may be nested for two levels. This means that an interrupt may be interrupted during its operation. However, to achieve this, the interrupt routine which may be further interrupted must contain the EI and DI instructions; otherwise as under normal operation, when an interrupt routine is activated all other interrupts are disabled. Simultaneously occurring interrupts: If more than one interrupt occurs sequentially, priority is given to the interrupt occurring first. If two or more interrupts occur simultaneously, the interrupt routine with the lower pointer number is given the higher priority. Using general timers within interrupt routines: FX PLCs have a range of special timers which can be used within interrupt routines. For more information please see page 4-18, Timers Used in Interrupt and CALL Subroutines. Input trigger signals - pulse duration: Interrupt routines which are triggered directly by interrupt inputs, such as X0 etc., require a signal duration of approximately 200sec, i.e. the input pulse width is equal or greater than 200sec. When this type of interrupt is selected, the hardware input filters are automatically reset to 50sec. (under normal operating circumstances the input filters are set to 10msec.). Pulse catch function: Direct high speed inputs can be used to catch short pulsed signals. When a pulse is received at an input a corresponding special M coil is set ON. This allows the captured pulse to be used to trigger further actions, even if the original signal is now OFF. FX1S, FX1N, FX2N and FX2NC units require the EI instruction (FNC 04) to activate pulse catch for inputs X0 through X5, with M8170 to M8175 indicating the caught pulse. Note that, if an input device is being used for another high speed function, then the pulse catch for that device is disabled.

5-11

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.1.5

FEND (FNC 06)

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic FEND FNC 06 (First end)

Function Used to indicate the end of the main program block

Operands D

Program steps

FEND: N/A 1 step Note: Can be used with CJ (FNC 00), CALL (FNC 01) and interrupt routines

Operation: An FEND instruction indicates the first end of a main program and the start of the program area to be used for subroutines. Under normal operating circumstances the FEND instruction performs a similar action to the END instruction, i.e. output processing, input processing and watchdog timer refresh are all carried out on execution. Points to note: a) The FEND instruction is commonly used with CJ-P-FEND, CALL-P-SRET and I-IRET program constructions (P refers to program pointer, I refers to interrupt pointer). Both CALL pointers/subroutines and interrupt pointers (I) subroutines are ALWAYS programmed after an FEND instruction, i.e. these program features NEVER appear in the body of a main program.
0 0

X10 = OFF

Main program
X10 CJ P 20

X11 = ON

Main program
X11 CJ P 21

X11 = OFF

Main program
FEND
P20

Main program
FEND

Main program
FEND END

X10 = ON

P21

Subroutine Interrupt prog'

END

I100

b) Multiple occurrences of FEND instructions can be used to separate different subroutines (see diagram above). c) The program flow constructions are NOT allowed to be split by an FEND instruction. d) FEND can never be used after an END instruction.

5-12

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.1.6

WDT (FNC 07)

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic WDT FNC 07 (Watch dog timer refresh)

Function Used to refresh the watch dog timer during a program scan

Operands D N/A Can be driven at any time within the main program body

Program steps WDT, WDTP: 1 step

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Operation: The WDT instruction refreshes the PLC s watchdog timer. The watchdog timer checks that the program scan (operation) time does not exceed an arbitrary time limit. It is assumed that if this time limit is exceeded there is an error at some point. The PLC will then cease operation to prevent any further errors from occurring. By causing the watchdog timer to refresh (driving the WDT instruction) the usable scan (program operation) time is effectively increased.

WDT

Main program
END

Main program pt1

WDT

Program(pt1) scan time 60 msec

Program scan time 120 msec

Main program pt2

END

Program(pt2) scan time 60 msec

Points to note: a) When the WDT instruction is used it will operate on every program scan so long as its input condition has been made. To force the WDT instruction to operate for only ONE scan requires the user to program some form of interlock. b) The watchdog timer has a default setting of 200 msec. This time limit may be customized to a users own requirement by editing the contents of data register D8000, the watchdog timer register.
M8000

MOV K150 D8000

5-13

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.1.7

FOR, NEXT (FNC 08, 09)

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic FOR FNC 08 (Start of a FOR-NEXT loop) NEXT FNC 09 (End of a FOR-NEXT loop)

Function

Operands S

Program steps FOR: 3 step

Identifies the start K, H, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, position and the T, C, D, V, Z number of repeats for the loop Identifies the end position for the loop

NEXT: N/A 1 step Note: The FOR-NEXT loop can be nested for 5 levels, i.e. 5 FOR-NEXT loops are programmed within each other.

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

[S] FOR K1X0 NEXT

Operation: The FOR and NEXT instructions allow the specification of an area of program, i.e. the program enclosed by the instructions, which is to be repeated S number of times.

Points to note: a) The FOR instruction operates in a 16 bit mode hence, the value of the operand S may be within the range of 1 to 32,767. If a number between the range -32,768 and 0 (zero) is specified it is automatically replaced by the value 1, i.e. the FOR-NEXT loop would execute once. b) The NEXT instruction has NO operand. c) The FOR-NEXT instructions must be programmed as a pair e.g. for every FOR instruction there MUST be an associated NEXT instruction. The same applies to the NEXT instructions, there MUST be an associated FOR instruction. The FOR-NEXT instructions must also be programmed in the correct order. This means that programming a loop as a NEXT-FOR (the paired NEXT instruction proceeds the associated FOR instruction) is NOT allowed. Inserting an FEND instruction between the FOR-NEXT instructions, i.e. FOR-FEND- NEXT, is NOT allowed. This would have the same effect as programming a FOR without a NEXT instruction, followed by the FEND instruction and a loop with a NEXT and no associated FOR instruction. d) A FOR-NEXT loop operates for its set number of times before the main program is allowed to finish the current program scan. e) When using FOR-NEXT loops care should be taken not the exceed the PLCs watchdog timer setting. The use of the WDT instruction and/or increasing the watchdog timer value is recommended.

5-14

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

Nested FOR-NEXT loops: FOR-NEXT instructions can be nested for 5 levels. This means that 5 FOR-NEXT loops can be sequentially programmed within each other. In the example a 3 level nest has been programmed. As each new FOR-NEXT nest level is encountered the number of times that loop is repeated is increased by the multiplication of all of the surrounding/previous loops. For example, loop C operates 4 times. But within this loop there is a nested loop, B. For every c o m p le t e d c y c le o f lo o p C , l o o p B w i l l b e completely executed, i.e. it will loop D0Z times. This again applies between loops B and A. The total number of times that loop A will operate for ONE scan of the program will equal; 1) The number of loop A operations multiplied by 2) The number of loop B operations multiplied by 3) The number of loop C operations If values were associated to loops A, B and C, e.g. 7, 6 and 4 respectively, the following number of operations would take place in ONE program scan: Number of loop C operations = 4 times Number of loop B operations = 24 times (C B, 4 6) Number of loop A operations = 168 times (C B A, 4 6 7) Note: The use of the CJ programming feature, causing the jump to P22 allows the selection of which loop will be processed and when, i.e. if X10 was switched ON, loop A would no longer operate.
P22

FOR

FOR D 0Z X10 CJ P 22

FOR K1X0 AB C NEXT NEXT NEXT

5-15

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

Applied Instructions:

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

FNC 00 - 09

Program Flow Move And Compare

5-4 5-16

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

FNC 10 - 19

FNC 20 - 29

Arithmetic And Logical Operations (+, -, , )

5-24

FNC 30 - 39

5-34 5-42 5-52 5-66 5-80 5-94 5-110 5-118 5-122 5-126 5-136 5-146 5-146 5-150

FNC 40 - 49

FNC 50 - 59

FNC 60 - 69

FNC 70 - 79

FNC 80 - 89

FNC 110-129

FNC 130-139

FNC 140-149

FNC 150-159

FNC 160-169

FNC 170-179

FNC 180-189

FNC 220-249

5-16

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.2

Move And Compare - Functions 10 to 19

Contents: Page CMP ZCP MOV SMOV CML BMOV FMOV XCH BCD BIN Compare Zone Compare Move Shift Move Compliment Block Move Fill Move Exchange Binary Coded Decimal Binary FNC 10 FNC 11 FNC 12 FNC 13 FNC 14 FNC 15 FNC 16 FNC 17 FNC 18 FNC 19 5-17 5-17 5-18 5-18 5-19 5-20 5-21 5-21 5-22 5-22

DPPPP - A 32 bit mode instruction modified to use pulse (single) operation.

( - A repetitive instruction which will change the destination value on every scan unless
modified by the pulse function.

) - An operand which cannot be indexed, i.e. The addition of V or Z is either invalid or will
have no effect to the value of the operand.

5-17

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.2.1

CMP (FNC 10)

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic CMP FNC 10 (Compare)

Function

Operands S2

Compares two K, H, data values KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, results of <, = and T, C, D, V, Z > are given.

D Y, M, S Note: 3 consecutive devices are used.

Program steps CMP, CMPP: 7 steps DCMP, DCMPP: 13 steps

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Operation:
X0 M0 M1 M2 [ S1 ] [ S2 ] [ D ] CMP K 100 C 20 M 0 C20>K100,M0=ON C20=K100,M1=ON C20>K100,M2=ON

The data of S1 is compared to the data of S2. The result is indicated by 3 bit devices specified from the head address entered as D. The bit devices indicate: S2 is less than S1 - bit device D is ON S2 is equal to S1 - bit device D+1 is ON S2 is greater than S1 - bit device D+2 is ON

Note: The destination (D) device statuses will be kept even if the CMP instruction is deactivated. Full algebraic comparisons are used, i.e. -10 is smaller than +2 etc.

5-18

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.2.2

ZCP (FNC 11)

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic ZCP FNC 11 (Zone compare)

Function

Compares a data value against a data range results of <, = and Note: > are given. S1 should be less than S2

S1 S2 K, H, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z

Operands S3

D Y, M, S Note:

Program steps ZCP,Z CPP: 9 steps

3 consecutive DZCP, DZCPP: devices are 17 steps used.

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

[ S1 ] [ S2 ] [ S3 ] [ D ] ZCP K 100 K 120 C 30 M 3 M3 M4 M5 C30<100,K120,M3=ON K100 C30 K120,M4=ON C30>K100,K120,M5=ON

Operation: The operation is the same as the CMP instruction except a single data value (S3) is compared against a data range (S1-S2). S3 is less than S1and S2- bit device D is ON S3 is equal to or between S1 and S2 - bit device D+1 is ON S3 is greater than both S1 and S2 - bit device D+2 is ON

5-19

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.2.3

MOV (FNC 12)

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic MOV FNC 12

(Move)

Function Moves data from one storage area to a new storage area

Operands S D K, H, KnY, KnM, KnS, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z T, C, D, V, Z

Program steps MOV, MOVP: 5 steps DMOV, DMOVP: 9 steps

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Flags

Zero M8020

[S]

[D]

MOV H0050 D 10

Operation: The contents of the source device (S) is copied to the destination (D) device when the control input is active. If the MOV instruction is not driven, no operation takes place.

Note: This instruction has a special programming technique which allows it to mimic the operation of newer applied instructions when used with older programming tools. See page 1-5 for more details.

5-20

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.2.4

SMOV (FNC 13)

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic SMOV FNC 13 (Shift move)

Function

Operands m1 m2 n S K, H, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T,C,D,V,Z D K, H, KnY, KnM, KnS, T,C,D,V,Z

Program steps SMOV, SMOVP: 11 steps

Takes elements of K, H an existing 4 digit Note: available decimal number range 1 to 4. and inserts them ) into a new 4 digit number

Range 0 to 9,999 (decimal) or 0 to 9,999 (BCD) when M8168 is used see note opposite

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

[ S ] m1 m2 [ D ] n SMOV D 1 K 4 K 2 D 2 K 3

Operation 1: This instruction copies a specified number of digits from a 4 digit decimal source (S) and places them at a specified location within a destination (D) number (also a 4 digit decimal). The existing data in the

destination is overwritten. Key: m1 - The source position of the 1st digit to be moved m2 - The number of source digits to be moved n- The destination position for the first digit Note: The selected destination must NOT be smaller than the quantity of source data. Digit positions are referenced by number: 1= units, 2= tens, 3= hundreds, 4=thousands.
FX1S FX1N FX2N FX2NC

Operation 2: (Applicable units, FX2N and FX2NC). This modification of the SMOV operation allows BCD numbers to be manipulated in exactly the same way as the normal SMOV manipulates decimal numbers, i.e. This instruction copies a specified number of digits from a 4 digit BCD source (S) and places them at a specified location within a destination (D) number (also a 4 digit BCD number).
X0

M8168 [ S ] m1 m2 [ D ] n SMOV D 1 K 4 K 2 D 2 K 3 M8000 M8168

To select the BCD mode the SMOV instruction is coupled with special M coil M8168 which is driven ON. Please remember that this is a mode setting operation and will be active, i.e. all SMOV instructions will operate in BCD format until the mode is reset, i.e. M8168 is forced OFF.

General note: For more information about decimal and Binary Coded Decimal (BCD) numbers please see the section titled Interpreting Word Data on page 4-42 for more details.

5-21

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.2.5

CML (FNC 14)

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic

Function

Operands S D KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z

Program steps CML,CMLP: 5 steps DCML, DCMLP: 9 steps

K, H, Copies and CML FNC 14 inverts the source KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z (Compliment) bit pattern to a specified destination

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

[S] CML D0

[D] K1Y0

Operation: A copy of each data bit within the source device (S) is inverted and then moved to a designated destination (D).

This means each occurrence of a 1 in the source data will become a 0 in the destination data while each source digit which is 0 will become a 1. If the destination area is smaller than the source data then only the directly mapping bit devices will be processed.

5-22

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.2.6

BMOV (FNC 15)

FX1S
Operands S KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T,C,D, V, Z (RAM) File registers, D KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z (RAM) File registers, see note d) n K, H D (FX2C, FX2N only)

FX1N FX2N FX2NC

Mnemonic

Function

Program steps BMOV, BMOVP: 7 steps

Copies a specified BMOV FNC 15 block of multiple (Block move) data elements to a new destination

Note: n 512

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

A qu an tity of con se cu tively o ccu rring d ata elements can be copied to a new destination. The source data is identified as a device head address (S) and a quantity of consecutive data elements (n). This is moved to the destination device (D) for the same number of elements (n).
BMOV K3

[S] [D] D5 D7

Operation:

Points to note: a) If the quantity of source devices (n) exceeds the actual number of available source devices, then only those devices which fall in the available range will be used. b) If the number of source devices exceeds the available space at the destination location, then only the available destination devices will be written to. c) The BMOV instruction has a built in automatic feature to prevent overwriting errors from occurring when the source (S - n) and destination (D -n) data ranges coincide. This is clearly identified in the following diagram: (Note: The numbered arrows indicate the order in which the BMOV is processed)
X0 D5 D6 D7 3 2 1 D7 D8 D9 D 18 D 19 D 20 D 21

BMOV

BMOV D 20 D 18 K 4

D 20 D 21 3 D 22 D 23 4

1 2

d) Using file registers as the destination devices [D]may be performed on all units.

5-23

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.2.7

FMOV (FNC 16)

Operands S KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z D KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z K, H

FX1S
Function

FX1N FX2N FX2NC

Program steps FMOV,FMOVP:7 steps DFMOV,DFMOVP : 13 steps

Mnemonic FMOV FNC 16 (Fill move)

Copies a single data device to a range of destination devices

Note:n 512

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Operation: The data stored in the source device (S) is copied to FMOV K 0 D 0 K 10 every device within the destination range. The range is specified by a device head address (D) and a quantity of consecutive elements (n). If the specified number of destination devices (n) exceeds the available space at the destination location, then only the available destination devices will be written to.
X0 [S] [D] n

Note: This instruction has a special programming technique which allows it to mimic the operation of newer applied instructions when used with older programming tools. See page 15 for more details.

5-24

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.2.8

XCH (FNC 17)

Operands D1

FX1S
Function

FX1N FX2N FX2NC

Program steps XCH,XCHP: 5 steps DXCH, DXCHP: 9 steps

Mnemonic XCH FNC 17 (Exchange)

Data in the designated devices is exchanged

KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z Note: when using the byte XCH (i.e.M8160 is ON) D1 and D2 must be the same device otherwise a program error will occur and M8067 will be turned ON

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Operation 1: The contents of the two destination devices D1 and D 2 are swapped, i.e. the complete word devices are exchanged. Ex.
X0 [ D1 ] [ D2 ] XCH(P) D 1 D 17
Data register D1 D17 Before XCH 20 530 After XCH 530 20

Operation 2: This function is equivalent to FNC 147 SWAP The bytes within each word of the designated devices D1 are exchanged when byte mode flag M8160 is ON. Please note that the mode will remain active until it is reset, i.e. M8160 is forced OFF. Ex.
X20
M8160

Values are in Hex for clarity Before DXCH After DXCH D10 Byte 1 Byte 1 Byte 1 Byte 1 1FH 8BH C4H 35H 8BH 1FH 35H C4H

[ D1 ] [ D2 ] M8000
DXCH(P) D 10 D 10 M8160

D11

5-25

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.2.9

BCD (FNC18)
Operands

FX1S
Function

FX1N FX2N FX2NC

Program steps BCD, BCDP: 5 steps DBCD, DBCDP: 9 steps

Mnemonic BCD FNC 18 (Binary coded decimal)

Converts binary numbers to BCD equivalents / Converts floating point data to scientific format

S D KnX,KnY, KnM, KnS, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z T, C, D, V, Z When using M8023 to convert data to scientific format, only double word (32 bit) data registers (D) may be used. See page 4-46 for more details regarding floating point format.

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

[S]

[D]

BCD D 12 K2Y0

X30 [S] M8000

DBCD D 20

M8023

[D] D 42
M8023

Operation: (Applicable to all units) The binary source data (S) is converted into an equivalent BCD number and stored at the destination device (D). If the converted BCD number exceeds the operational ranges of 0 to 9,999 (16 bit operation) and 0 to 99,999,999 (32 bit operation) an error will occur.This instruction can be used to output data directly to a seven segment display.

5-26

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.2.10

BIN (FNC 19)

Operands

FX1S
Function

FX1N FX2N FX2NC

Program steps BIN, BINP: 5 steps DBIN, DBINP: 9 steps

Mnemonic BIN FNC 19 (Binary)

S D KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, KnY, KnM, KnS, Converts BCD T, C, D, V, Z T, C, D, V, Z numbers to their binary equivalent / When using M8023 to convert data to floating Converts scientific point format, only double word (32 bit) data regformat data to float- isters (D) may be used. See page 4-46 for more ing point format details regarding floating point format.

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Operation: (Applicable to all units) The BCD source data (S) is converted into an BIN K2X0 D 13 e quiva le nt b in ary n um ber and store d a t the destination device (D). If the source data is not provided in a BCD format an error will occur. This instruction can be used to read in data directly from thumbwheel switches.
X0 [S] [D]

5-27

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

Applied Instructions:

FX1S

FX1N FX2N FX2NC

1. 2.

FNC 00 - 09

Program Flow Move And Compare

5-4 5-16

FNC 10 - 19

3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

FNC 20 - 29

Arithmetic And Logical Operations (+, -, , )

5-24

FNC 30 - 39

5-34 5-42 5-52 5-66 5-80 5-94 5-110 5-118 5-122 5-126 5-136 5-146 5-146 5-150

FNC 40 - 49

FNC 50 - 59

FNC 60 - 69

FNC 70 - 79

FNC 80 - 89

FNC 110-129

FNC 130-139

FNC 140-149

FNC 150-159

FNC 160-169

FNC 170-179

FNC 180-189

FNC 220-249

5-28

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.3

Arithmetic And Logical Operations Functions 20 to 29

Contents: ADD SUB MUL DIV INC DEC WAND WOR WXOR NEG Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Increment Decrement Word AND Word OR Word Exclusive OR Negation FNC 20 FNC 21 FNC 22 FNC 23 FNC 24 FNC 25 FNC 26 FNC 27 FNC 28 FNC 29 Page 5-25 5-26 5-27 5-28 5-29 5-29 5-30 5-30 5-31 5-31

DPPPP - A 32 bit mode instruction modified to use pulse (single) operation.

( - A repetitive instruction which will change the destination value on every scan unless
modified by the pulse function.

) - An operand which cannot be indexed, i.e. The addition of V or Z is either invalid or will
have no effect to the value of the operand.

5-29

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.3.1

ADD (FNC 20)

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic ADD FNC 20 (Addition)

Function The value of the two source devices is added and the result stored in the destination device

Operands S1 S2 D K, H, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z

Program steps

KnY, KnM, KnS, ADD, ADDP: T, C, D, V, Z 7 steps

When using M8023 to add floating point data, only double word (32 bit) data registers (D) or DADD, DADDP: constants (K/H) may be used. See page 4-46 for more details regarding floating point format. 13 steps

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Operation: (Applicable to all units)

X0 ADD [ S1 ] [ S2 ] [ D ] D 10 D 12 D 14

The data contained within the source devices (S1,S2) is combined and the total is stored at the specified destination device (D).

Points to note: a) All calculations are algebraically processed, i.e. 5 + (-8)= -3. b) The same device may be used as a source (S1 or S2) and as the destination (D). If this is the case then the ADD instruction would actually operate continuously. This means on every scan the instruction would add the result of the last scan to the second source device. To prevent this from happening the pulse modifier should be used or an interlock should be programmed. c) If the result of a calculation is 0" then a special auxiliary flag, M8020 is set ON. d) If the result of an operation exceeds 32,767 (16 bit limit) or 2,147,483,647 (32 bit limit) the carry flag, M8022 is set ON. If the result of an operation exceeds -32,768 or -2,147,483,648 the borrow flag, M8021 is set ON. When a result exceeds either of the number limits, the appropriate flag is set ON (M8021 or M8022) and a portion of the carry/borrow is stored in the destination device. The mathematical sign of this stored data is reflective of the number limit which has been exceeded, i.e. when -32,768 is exceeded negative numbers are stored in the destination device but if 32,767 was exceeded positive numbers would be stored at D. e) If the destination location is smaller than the obtained result, then only the portion of the result which directly maps to the destination area will be written, i.e if 25 (decimal) was the result, and it was to be stored at K1Y4 then only Y4 and Y7 would be active. In binary terms this is equivalent to a decimal value of 9 a long way short of the real result of 25!

5-30

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.3.2

SUB (FNC 21)

Operands S1 S2

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic SUB FNC 21 (Subtract)

Function One source device is subtracted from the other - the result is stored in the destination device

Program steps

K, H, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z

KnY, KnM, KnS, SUB, SUBP: T, C, D, V, Z 7steps DSUB, DSUBP: 13 steps

When using M8023 to subtract floating point data, only double word (32 bit) data registers (D) or constants (K/H) may be used. See page 4-46 for more details regarding floating point format.

Zero M8020

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Flags

Borrow M8021 Carry M8022

X0 SUB

[ S1 ] [ S2 ] [ D ] D 10 D 12 D 14

Operation: (Applicable to all units) The data contained within the source device, S2 is subtracted from the contents of source device S1. The result or remainder of this calculation is stored

in the destination device D. Note: the Points to note, under the ADD instruction (previous page) can also be similarly applied to the subtract instruction.

5-31

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.3.3

MUL (FNC 22)

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic MUL FNC 22 (Multiplica -tion)

Function Multiplies the two source devices together the result is stored in the destination device

Operands S1 S2 D KnY,KnM,KnS, T, C, D, Z(V) Note: Z(V) may NOT be used for 32 bit operation K, H, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z See page 4-46 for more details regarding floating point format.

Program steps MUL, MULP: 7steps DMUL, DMULP: 13 steps

When using M8023 to subtract floating point data, only double word (32 bit) data registers (D) or constants (K/H) may be used.
16 BIT OPERATION 32 BIT OPERATION PULSE-P

X0 MUL

[ S1 ] [ S2 ] [ D ] D0 D2 D4

Operation: (Applicable to all units) The contents of the two source devices (S1, S2) are multiplied together and the result is stored at the destination device (D). Note the normal rules of algebra apply.

Points to note: a) When operating the MUL instruction in 16bit mode, two 16 bit data sources are multiplied together. They produce a 32 bit result. The device identified as the destination address is the lower of the two devices used to store the 32 bit result. Using the above example with some test data: 5 (D0) 7 (D2) = 35 - The value 35 is stored in (D4, D5) as a single 32 bit word. b) When operating the MUL instruction in 32 bit mode, two 32 bit data sources are multiplied together. They produce a 64 bit result. The device identified as the destination address is the lower of the four devices used to store the 64 bit result. c) If the location of the destination device is smaller than the obtained result, then only the portion of the result which directly maps to the destination area will be written, i.e if a result of 72 (decimal) is to be stored at K1Y4 then only Y7 would be active. In binary terms this is equivalent to a decimal value of 8, a long way short of the real result of 72! Viewing 64 bit numbers It is currently impossible to monitor the contents of a 64 bit result. However, the result can be monitored in two smaller,32 bit, blocks, i.e. a 64 bit result is made up of the following parts: (upper 32 bits) 2 32 + (lower 32 bits).

5-32

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.3.4

DIV (FNC 23)

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic DIV FNC 23 (Division)

Function Divides one source value by another the result is stored in the destination device

Operands S1 S2 D

Program steps

K, H, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS,T, KnY, KnM, KnS, DIV,DIVP: C, D, V, Z T, C, D, Z(V) 7steps See page 4-46 for more details regarding floating point format. Note: Z(V) may NOT be used for DDIV, 32 bit operation DDIVP: 13 steps When using M8023 to subtract floating point data, only double word (32 bit) data registers (D) or constants (K/H) may be used.used to perform
PULSE-P

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

[ S1 ] [ S2 ] [ D ] DIV D0 D2 D4

Operation: (Applicable to all units) The primary source (S1) is divided by the secondary source (S2). The result is stored in the destination (D). Note the normal rules of algebra apply.

Points to note: a) When operating the DIV instruction in 16bit mode, two 16 bit data sources are divided into each other. They produce two 16 bit results. The device identified as the destination address is the lower of the two devices used to store the these results. This storage device will actually contain a record of the number of whole times S2 will divide into S1 (the quotient). The second, following destination register contains the remained left after the last whole division (the remainder). Using the previous example with some test data: 51 (D0) 10 (D2) = 5(D4) 1(D5) This result is interpreted as 5 whole divisions with 1 left over (5 10 + 1 = 51). b) When operating the DIV instruction in 32 bit mode, two 32 bit data sources are divided into each other. They produce two 32 bit results. The device identified as the destination address is the lower of the two devices used to store the quotient and the following two devices are used to store the remainder, i.e. if D30 was selected as the destination of 32 bit division operation then D30, D31 would store the quotient and D32, D33 would store the remainder. If the location of the destination device is smaller than the obtained result, then only the portion of the result which directly maps to the destination area will be written. If bit devices are used as the destination area, no remainder value is calculated. c) If the value of the source device S2 is 0 (zero) then an operation error is executed and the operation of the DIV instruction is cancelled.

5-33

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.3.5

INC (FNC 24)

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic INC FNC 24 (Increment)

Function The designated device is incremented by 1 on every execution of the instruction

Operands D KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z Standard V,Z rules apply for 32 bit operation

Program steps INC,INCP: 3 steps DINC, DINCP: 5 steps

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

On every execution of the instruction the device specified as the destination D, has its current value incremented (increased) by a value of 1. In 16 bit operation, when +32,767 is reached, the next increment will write a value of -32,768 to the destination device. In 32 bit operation, when +2,147,483,647 is reached the next increment will write a value of 2,147,483,648 to the destination device. In both cases there is no additional flag to identify this change in the counted value.
INC D 10

[D]

Operation:

5-34

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.3.6

DEC (FNC 24)

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic

Function

Operands D

Program steps DEC,DECP: 3 steps DDEC, DDECP: 5 steps

KnY, KnM, KnS, DEC The designated T, C, D, V, Z FNC 25 device is (Decrement) decremented by 1 Standard V,Z rules apply for 32 bit operation on every execution of the instruction

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

On every execution of the instruction the device specified as the destination D, has its current value decremented (decreased) by a value of 1. In 16 bit operation, when -32,768 is reached the next increment will write a value of +32,767 to the destination device. In 32 bit operation, when -2,147,483,648 is reached the next increment will write a value of +2,147,483,647 to the destination device. In both cases there is no additional flag to identify this change in the counted value.
DEC D 10

[D]

Operation:

5-35

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.3.7

WAND (FNC 26)

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic WAND FNC 26 (Logical word AND)

Function A logical AND is performed on the source devices result stored at destination

Operands S1 K, H, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z S2 D

Program steps

KnY, KnM, KnS, WAND,WANDP: T, C, D, V, Z 7 steps DAND, DANDP: 13 steps

PULSE-P

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

The bit patterns of the two source devices are analyzed (the contents of S2is compared against the contents of S1). The result of the logical AND analysis is stored in the destination device (D). The following rules are used to determine the result of a logical AND operation. This takes place for every bit contained within the source devices: General rule: (S1) Bit n WAND (S2) Bit n = (D) Bit n 1 WAND 1 = 1 0 WAND 1 = 0 1 WAND 0 = 0 0 WAND 0 = 0
WAND D 10 D 12 D 14

[ S1 ] [ S2 ] [ D ]

Operation:

5-36

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.3.8

WOR (FNC 27)

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic WOR FNC 27 (Logical word OR)

Function A logical OR is performed on the source devices result stored at destination

Operands S1 K,H, KnX,KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z S2 D

Program steps

KnY, KnM, KnS, WOR,WORP: T, C, D, V, Z 7 steps DOR, DORP: 13 steps

PULSE-P

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

The bit patterns of the two source devices are analyzed (the contents of S2is compared against the contents of S 1). The result of the logical OR analysis is stored in the destination device (D). The following rules are used to determine the result of a logical OR operation. This takes place for every bit contained within the source devices: General rule: (S1) Bit n WOR (S2) Bit n = (D) Bit n 1 WOR 1 = 1 0 WOR 1 = 1 1 WOR 0 = 1 0 WOR 0 = 0
WOR D 10 D 12 D 14

[ S1 ] [ S2 ] [ D ]

Operation:

5-37

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.3.9

WXOR (FNC 28)

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic WXOR FNC 28 (Logical exclusive OR)

Function A logical XOR is performed on the source devices result stored at destination

Operands S1 S2 D K, H KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z

Program steps

KnY, KnM, KnS, WXOR, T, C, D, V, Z WXORP: 7 steps DXOR,DXORP 13 steps

PULSE-P

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

The bit patterns of the two source devices are analyzed (the contents of S 2 is compared against the contents of S1). The result of the logical XOR analysis is stored in the destination device (D). The following rules are used to determine the result of a logical XOR operation. This takes place for every bit contained within the source devices: General rule: (S1)Bit n WXOR (S2)Bit n = (D)Bit n 1 WXOR 1 = 0 0 WXOR 1 = 1 1 WXOR 0 = 1 0 WXOR 0 = 0
WXOR D 10 D 12 D 14

[ S1 ] [ S2 ] [ D ]

Operation:

5-38

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.3.10

NEG (FNC 29)

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic NEG FNC 29 (Negation)

Function Logically inverts the contents of the designated device KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z

Operands D

Program steps NEG,NEGP: 3 steps DNEG, DNEGP: 5 steps

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

The bit pattern of the selected device is inverted. This means any occurrence of a 1 becomes a 0 and any occurrence of a 0 will be written as a 1. When this is complete, a further binary 1 is added to the bit pattern. The result is the total logical sign change of the selected devices contents, e.g. a positive number will become a negative number or a negative number will become a positive.
NEG D 10

[D]

Operation:

5-39

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

MEMO

5-40

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

Applied Instructions:

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

1. 2. 3.

FNC 00 - 09

Program Flow Move And Compare

5-4 5-16

FNC 10 - 19

FNC 20 - 29

Arithmetic And Logical Operations (+, -, , )

5-24

4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

FNC 30 - 39

5-34 5-42 5-52 5-66 5-80 5-94 5-110 5-118 5-122 5-126 5-136 5-146 5-146 5-150

FNC 40 - 49

FNC 50 - 59

FNC 60 - 69

FNC 70 - 79

FNC 80 - 89

FNC 110-129

FNC 130-139

FNC 140-149

FNC 150-159

FNC 160-169

FNC 170-179

FNC 180-189

FNC 220-249

5-41

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.4

Rotation And Shift - Functions 30 to 39

Contents: Page ROR ROL RCR RCL SFTR SFTL WSFR WSFL SFWR SFRD Rotation Right Rotation Left Rotation Right with Carry Rotation Left with Carry (Bit) Shift Right (Bit) Shift Left Word Shift Right Word Shift Left Shift Register Write Shift Register Read FNC 30 FNC 31 FNC 32 FNC 33 FNC 34 FNC 35 FNC 36 FNC 37 FNC 38 FNC 39 5-35 5-35 5-36 5-36 5-37 5-37 5-38 5-38 5-39 5-40

DPPPP - A 32 bit mode instruction modified to use pulse (single) operation.

( - A repetitive instruction which will change the destination value on every scan unless
modified by the pulse function.

) - An operand which cannot be indexed, i.e. The addition of V or Z is either invalid or will
have no effect to the value of the operand.

5-42

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.4.1

ROR (FNC 30)

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic ROR FNC 30 (Rotation right)

Function The bit pattern of the destination device is rotated n places to the right on every execution

Operands D KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z Note: 16 bit operation Kn=K4, 32 bit operation Kn=K8 n K, H,

Program steps ROR, RORP: 5 steps DROR, DRORP: 9 steps

Note: 16 bit operation n 16 32 bit operation n 32

PULSE-P

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

Flags

Carry M8022

[D] ROR D 0

[n] K4

Operation: The bit pattern of the destination device (D) is rotated n bit places to the right on every operation of the instruction. The status of the last bit rotated is copied to the carry flag M8022. The example shown left is based on the instruction noted above it, where the bit pattern represents the contents of D0.

1111111100000000
M8022 After 1 rotation Carry MSB 0000111111110000 M8022

LSB

5-43

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.4.2

ROL (FNC 31)

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic ROL FNC 31 (Rotation left)

Function The bit pattern of the destination device is rotated n places to the left on every execution

Operands S KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z Note: 16 bit operation Kn= K4, 32 bit operation Kn= K8 D K, H,

Program steps ROL,ROLP: 5 steps DROL, DROLP: 7 steps

Note: 16 bit operation n 16 32 bit operation n 32

PULSE-P

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

Flags

Carry M8022

Operation:
X0 [D] ROL D 0 [n] K4

1111111100000000 MSB Carry

M8022

After 1 rotation

1111000000001111 1
M8022

LSB

The bit pattern of the destination device (D) is rotated n bit places to the left on every operation of the instruction. The status of the last bit rotated is copied to the carry flag M8022. The example shown left is based on the instruction noted above it, where the bit pattern represents the contents of D0.

5-44

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.4.3

RCR (FNC 32)

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic RCR FNC 32 (Rotation right with carry)

Function The contents of the destination device are rotated right with 1 bit extracted to the carry flag

Operands D KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z Note: 16 bit operation Kn= K4, 32 bit operation Kn=K8 n K, H,

Program steps RCR,RCRP: 5 steps DRCR, DRCRP: 7 steps

Note: 16 bit operation n 16 32 bit operation n 32

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Flags

Carry M8022

Operation:
X0 [D] RCR D 0 [n] K4

1111111100000000
M8022

Carry

0001111111110000
M8022

The bit pattern of the destination device (D)is rotated n bit places to the right on every operation of the instruction. The status of the last bit rotated is moved into the carry flag M8022. On the following operation of the instruction M8022 is the first bit to be moved back into the destination device. The example shown left is based on the instruction noted above it, where the bit pattern represents the contents of D0.

5-45

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.4.4

RCL (FNC 33)

Operands S KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic RCL FNC 33 (Rotation left with carry)

Function The contents of the destination device are rotated left with 1 bit extracted to the carry flag

Program steps RCL, RCLP: 5 steps DRCL, DRCLP: 9 steps

K, H,

Note: Note: 16 bit operation Kn= K4, 16 bit operation n 16 32 bit operation n 32 32 bit operation Kn= K8

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Flags

Carry M8022

[D] RCL D 0

[n] K4

Operation: The bit pattern of the destination device (D)is rotated n bit places to the left on every operation of the instruction. The status of the last bit rotated is moved into the carry flag M8022. On the following operation of the instruction M8022 is the first bit to be moved back into the destination device. The example shown left is based on the instruction noted above it, where the bit pattern represents the contents of D0.

1111111100000000
M8022

Carry

1111000000000111 1
M8022

5-46

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.4.5

SFTR (FNC 34)

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic

Function

Operands S D Y, M, S n1 n2 K,H,

Program steps SFTR,SFTRP: 9 steps

SFTR The status of the X, Y, M, S FNC 34 source devices are (Bit shift right) copied to a controlled bit stack moving the existing data to the right

Note: FX users: n2 n1 1024 FX0,FX0N users: n2 n1 512

PULSE-P

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

[S] [D] [n1] [n2] SFTR X 0 M 0 K 16 K 4

Operation: The instruction copies n 2 source devices to a bit stack of length n1. For every new addition of n2 bits, the existing data within the bit stack is shifted n2 bits to the right. Any bit data moving to a position exceeding the n1 limit is diverted to an overflow area. The bit shifting operation will occur every time the instruction is processed unless it is modified with either the pulse suffix or a controlled interlock.

X3 X2 X1 X0

M15 M14 M13M12

M11 M10 M9 M8

M7 M6 M5 M4

M3 M2 M1 M0

5-47

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.4.6

SFTL (FNC 35)

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic SFTL FNC 35 (Bit shift left)

Function

Operands S D n1 n2 K,H,

Program steps SFTL,SFTLP: 9steps

The status of the X, Y, M, S Y, M, S source devices are copied to a controlled bit stack moving the existing data to the left

Note: FX users: n2 n1 1024 FX0,FX0N users: n2 n1 512

PULSE-P

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

[S] [D] [n1] [n2]

SFTLX 10 Y 0 K 12 K 3

Operation: The instruction copies n 2 source devices to a bit stack of length n1. For every new addition of n2 bits, the existing data within the bit stack is shifted n2bits to the left. A ny bit d ata m oving to a po sition exceeding the n1 limit is diverted to an overflow area. The bit shifting operation will occur every time the instruction is processed unless it is modified with either the pulse suffix or a controlled interlock.

X12 X11 X10

Y13 Y12 Y11

Y10 Y7 Y6

Y5 Y4 Y3

Y2 Y1 Y0

5-48

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.4.7

WSFR (FNC 36)

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic WSFR FNC 36 (Word shift right)

Function

Operands S D n1 K,H, n2

Program steps WSFR, WSFRP: 9 steps

The value of the KnX, KnY, KnY,KnM, source devices are KnM,KnS, KnS, copied to a T, C, D T, C, D controlled word stack moving the existing data to the right
32 BIT OPERATION

Note: FX users: n2 n1 512

16 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Operation:
X0 [S] WSFR D 0 [D] [ n1 ] [ n2 ] K4 D 10 K 16

D3 (5)

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

D D D D D

13 17 21 25 3

D D D D D

10 14 18 22 0

D D D D

13 17 21 25

D D D D

10 14 18 22

D25 D24 D23 D22 D21 (4)

D18 D17 (3)

D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 (2) (1)

The instruction copies n2 source devices to a word stack of length n1. For each addition of n2 words, the existing data within the word stack is shifted n2words to the right. Any word data moving to a position exceeding the n1 limit is diverted to an overflow area. The word shifting operation will occur every time the instruction is processed unless it is modified with either the pulse suffix or a controlled interlock. Note : when using bit devices as source (S) and destination (D) the Kn value must be equal.

5-49

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.4.8

WSFL (FNC 37)

Operands S D n1

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic WSFL FNC 37 (Word shift left)

Function

Program steps WSFL, WSFLP: 9 steps

The value of the KnX, KnY, KnY,KnM, K,H, source devices are KnM,KnS, KnS, copied to a T, C, D T, C, D Note: controlled word FX users: stack moving the n2 n1 512 existing data to the left

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Operation:
X0 [S] WSFR D 0
25 21 17 13 3 D D D D D 22 18 14 10 0

[D]

[ n1 ] [ n2 ] K4

D 10 K 16

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

D D D D D

D D D D

25 21 17 13

D D D D

22 18 14 10

D25 D24 D23 D22 D21 (1) (2)

D18 D17 (3)

D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 (5) (4)

The instruction copies n2 source devices to a word stack of length n1. For each addition of n2 words, the existing data within the word stack is shifted n2words to the left. Any word data moving to a position exceeding the n1 limit is diverted to an overflow area. The word shifting operation will occur every time the instruction is processed unless it is modified with either the pulse suffix or a controlled interlock. Note : when using bit devices as source (S) and destination (D) the Kn value must be equal.

5-50

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.4.9

SFWR (FNC 38)

FX1S
Operands S K, H, KnX, KnY, KnM,KnS, T, C, D, V, Z D KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, N K, H,

FX1N FX2N FX2NC

Mnemonic SFWR FNC 38 (Shift register write)

Function This instruction creates and builds a FIFO stack n devices long -must be used with SFRD FNC 39

Program steps SFWR, SFWRP: 7 steps

Note: 2 n 512

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Flags

Carry M8022

[S] SFWR D 0

[D] D1

[n] K 10

Operation: The contents of the source device (S) are written to the FIFO stack. The position of insertion into the stack is automatically calculated by the PLC. The destination device (D) is the head address of the FIFO stack. The contents of D identify where the next record will be stored (as an offset from D+1). If the contents of D exceed the value n-1 (n is the length of the FIFO stack) then insertion into the FIFO stack is stopped. The carry flag M8022 is turned ON to identify this situation.

[S] D0

[n] = 10 D 10 D 9 D 8 D 7 D 6 D 5 D 4 D 3 D 2 D 1 (3) (2) (1)

Points to note: a) FIFO is an abbreviation for First-In/ First-OUT. b) Although n devices are assigned for the FIFO stack, only n-1 pieces of information may be written to that stack. This is because the head address device (D) takes the first available register to store the information regarding the next data insertion point into the FIFO stack. c) Before starting to use a FIFO stack ensure that the contents of the head address register (D) are equal to 0 (zero). d) This instruction should be used in conjunction with SFRD FNC 39. The n parameter in both

instructions should be equal.

5-51

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.4.10

SFRD (FNC 39)

FX1S
Operands S KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, KnY, KnM,KnS, T, C, D D KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, KnY, KnM,KnS, T, C, D, V, Z n K,H,

FX1N FX2N FX2NC

Mnemonic SFRD FNC 39 (Shift register read)

Function This instruction reads and reduces FIFO stack- must be used with SFWR FNC 38

Program steps SFRD, SFRDP: 7 steps

Note: 2 n 512

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Flags

Zero M8020

[S] SFRD D 1

[D] [n] D 20 K 10

Operation: The source device (S) identifies the head address of the FIFO stack. Its contents reflect the last entry point of data on to the FIFO stack, i.e. where the end of the FIFO is (current position). This instruction reads the first piece of data from the FIFO stack (register S+1), moves all of the data within the stack up one position to fill the read area and decrements the contents of the FIFO head address (S) by 1. The read data is written to the destination device (D). When the contents of the source device (S) are equal to 0 (zero), i.e. the FIFO stack is empty, the flag M8020 is turned ON.

[n] = 10 D 10 D 9 D 8 D 7 D 6 D 5 D 4 D 3 D 2 D 1

[D] D 20

Points to note: a) FIFO is an abbreviation for First-In/ First-OUT. b) Only n-1 pieces of data may be read from a FIFO stack. This is because the stack requires that the first register, the head address (S) is used to contain information about the current length of the FIFO stack. c) This instruction will always read the source data from the register S+1. d) This instruction should be used in conjunction with SFWR FNC 38. The n parameter in both instructions should be equal.

5-52

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

Applied Instructions:

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

1. 2. 3. 4.

FNC 00 - 09

Program Flow Move And Compare

5-4 5-16

FNC 10 - 19

FNC 20 - 29

Arithmetic And Logical Operations (+, -, , )

5-24

FNC 30 - 39

5-34 5-42 5-52 5-66 5-80 5-94 5-110 5-118 5-122 5-126 5-136 5-146 5-146 5-150

5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

FNC 40 - 49

FNC 50 - 59

FNC 60 - 69

FNC 70 - 79

FNC 80 - 89

FNC 110-129

FNC 130-139

FNC 140-149

FNC 150-159

FNC 160-169

FNC 170-179

FNC 180-189

FNC 220-249

5-53

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.5

Data Operation - Functions 40 to 49

Contents: Page ZRST DECO ENCO SUM BON MEAN ANS ANR SQR FLT Zone Reset Decode Encode The Sum Of Active Bits Check Specified Bit Status Mean (Timed) Annunciator Set Annunciator Reset Square Root Float, (Floating Point) FNC 40 FNC 41 FNC 42 FNC 43 FNC 44 FNC 45 FNC 46 FNC 47 FNC 48 FNC 49 5-43 5-43 5-44 5-45 5-45 5-46 5-47 5-47 5-48 5-49

DPPPP - A 32 bit mode instruction modified to use pulse (single) operation.

( - A repetitive instruction which will change the destination value on every scan unless
modified by the pulse function.

- An operand which cannot be indexed, i.e. The addition of V or Z is either invalid or will
have no effect to the value of the operand.

5-54

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.5.1

ZRST (FNC 40)

Operands S

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic ZRST FNC 40 (Zone Reset)

Function Used to reset a range of like devices in one operation

Program steps

Y, M,S, ZRST, T, C, D ZRSTP: Note: 5 steps D1must be less than or equal ( ) to D2. Standard and High speed counters cannot be mixed.

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

M8002

[D1]

[D2]

Operation: The range of devices, inclusive of those specified as the two destinations are reset, i.e. for data devices the current value is set to 0 (zero) and for bit elements, the devices are turned OFF, i.e. also set to 0 (zero).

ZRST M 500 M 599

The specified device range cannot contain mixed device types, i.e. C000 specified as the first destination device (D1) cannot be paired with T199 as the second destination device (D2). When resetting counters, standard and high speed counters cannot be reset as part of the same range. If D1 is greater than (>) D2 then only device D1 is reset.

5-55

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.5.2

DECO (FNC 41)

Operands S D
K, H,

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic DECO FNC 41 (Decode)

Function Source data value Q identifies the Qth bit of the destination device which will be turned ON

Program steps DECO, DECOP: 7 steps

K, H, Y, M, S, X, Y, M,S, T, C, D T, C, D, V, Z

Note: D= Y,M,S then n range = 1-8 D= T,C,D then n range = 1-4 n= 0, then no processing

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Operation:
X4 [S] [D] [n] DECO X 0 M 10 K 3
X2 X1 X0 0 1 1 4 2 1

+ =3

7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. 0. 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 M17 M16 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10

Source data is provided by a combination of operands S and n. Where S specifies the head address of the data and n, the number of consecutive bits. The source data is read as a single number (binary to decimal conversion) Q. The source number Q is the location of a bit within the destination device (D) which will be turned ON (see example opposite). When the destination device is a data device n must be within the range 1 to 4 as there are only 16 available destination bits in a single data word. All unused data bits within the word are set to 0.

5-56

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.5.3

ENCO (FNC 42)

Operands S D

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic ENCO FNC 42 (Encode)

Function

Program steps ENCO, ENCOP: 7 steps

X, Y, M, S, T, C, D, V, Then location of the highest active T, C, D, V, Z Z bit is stored as a numerical position from the head address

K, H,

Note: S=X, Y, M, S then n range=1-8 S= T,C,D then n range = 1-4 n = 0, then no processing
PULSE-P

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

Operation:
X5 [S] [D] [n] K3 ENCO M 10 D 10

7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. 0. 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 M17 M16 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 D10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 . . 4 2 1

The highest active bit within the readable range has its location noted as a numbered offset from the source head address (S). This is stored in the destination register (D).

+ =3

Points to note: a) The readable range is defined by the largest number storable in a binary format within the number of destination storage bits specified by n, i.e. if n was equal to 4 bits a maximum number within the range 0 to 15 can be written to the destination device. Hence, if bit devices were being used as the source data, 16 bit devices would be used, i.e. the head bit device and 15 further, consecutive devices. b) If the stored destination number is 0 (zero) then the source head address bit is ON, i.e. the active bit has a 0 (zero) offset from the head address. However, if NO bits are ON within the source area, 0 (zero) is written to the destination device and an error is generated. c) When the source device is a data or word device n must be taken from the range 1 to 4 as

there are only 16 source bits available within a single data word.

5-57

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.5.4

SUM (FNC 43)

Operands S

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic SUM FNC 43 (Sum of active bits)

Function

D KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z

Program steps SUM,SUMP: 7 steps DSUM, DSUMP: 9 steps

K, H, The number KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, (quantity) of T, C, D, V, Z active bits in the source data is stored in the destination device
32 BIT OPERATION

16 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Flags

Zero M8020

Operation:
X0 [S] SUM D0 [D] D2

D0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 b15 b0 D2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 . . 8 4 2 1

The number of active (ON) bits within the source device (S), i.e. bits which have a value of 1" are counted. The count is stored in the destination register (D). If a double word format is used, both the source and destination devices use 32 bit, double registers. The destination device will always have its upper 16 bits set to 0 (zero) as the counted value can never be more than 32. If no bits are ON then zero flag, M8020 is set.

5-58

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.5.5

BON (FNC 44)

Operands S D

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic BON FNC 44 (Check specified bit status)

Function The status of the specified bit in the source device is indicated at the destination

Program steps BON, BONP: 7steps DBONP, DBON: 13 steps

Y, M, S K, H, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z

K,H,

Note: 16 bit operation n=0 to 15 32 bit operation n=0 to 31

PULSE-P

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

Operation:
X0 [S] [D] [n] K 15 BON D 10 M 0

D 10 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 b0 b15 b15 = 1, M0 = 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 b15 = 0, M0 = 0

A single bit position (n) is specified from within a source device/area (S). n could be regarded as a specified offset from the source head address (S), i.e. 0 (zero) being the first device (a 0 offset) where as an offset of 15 would actually be the 16th device. If the identified bit becomes active, i.e. ON, the destination device (D) is activated to flag the new status. The destination device could be said to act as a mirror to the status of the selected bit source.

5-59

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.5.6

MEAN (FNC 45)

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic MEAN FNC 45 (Mean)

Function Calculates the mean of a range of devices

Operands S KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D D KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z K,H, n

Program steps MEAN, MEANP: 7 steps DMEAN, DMEANP: 13steps

Note: n= 1 to 64

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

[S] MEAN D 0

[D] D 10

[n] K3

Operation: The range of source data is defined by operands S and n. S is the head address of the source data and n specifies the number of consecutive source devices used. The value of all the devices within the source range is summed and then divided by the number of devices summed, i.e. n. This generates an in te g e r m e a n v a l u e w h i c h i s s to r e d in t h e destination device (D). The remainder of the calculated mean is ignored.

General rule
Sn

S = ( S0 + S1 + < + Sn )
n n

Example D10= (D0) + (D1) + (Dn) 3

Points to note: If the source area specified is actually smaller than the physically available area, then only the available devices are used. The actual value of n used to calculate the mean will reflect the used, available devices. However, the value for n which was entered into the instruction will still be displayed. This can cause confusion as the mean value calculated manually using this original n value will be different from that which is displayed. If the value of nis specified outside of the stated range (1 to 64) an error is generated.

5-60

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.5.7

ANS (FNC 46)

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic ANS FNC 46 (Timed annunciator set)

Function This instruction starts a timer. Once timed out the selected annunciator flag is set ON

Operands S T Note: available range T0 to T199 D S Note: annunciator range S900 to S999 K n

Program steps ANS: 7 steps

Note: n range 1 to 32,767 - in units of 100msec

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

This instruction, when energized, starts a timer (S) for n,100 msec. When the timer completes its cycle the assigned annunciator (D) is set ON. If the instruction is switched OFF during or after completion of the timing cycle the timer is automatically reset. However, the current status of the annunciator coil remains unchanged.
ANS T0 K 10 S900

[S]

[n]

[D]

Operation:

Note: This is only one method of driving annunciator coils, others such as direct setting can also be used.

5-61

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.5.8

ANR (FNC 47)

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic ANR FNC 47 (Annunciator

reset)

Function The lowest active annunciator is reset on every operation of this instruction
32 BIT OPERATION

Operands D

Program steps ANR,ANRP: 1step

N/A

16 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Annunciators which have been activated are sequentially reset one-by-one, each time the ANR instruction is operated. If the ANR instruction is driven continuously it will carry out its resetting operation on every program scan unless it is modified by the pulse, P prefix or by a user defined program interlock.
ANR

Operation:

5-62

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.5.9

SQR (FNC 48)

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic SQR FNC 48 (Square root)

Function Performs a mathematical square root e.g.: D= S K,H,D

Operands S D D

Program steps

SQR, SQRP: 5 steps When using M8023 in float mode, only DSQR, double word (32bit) data can be processed. See page 4- 46 for more details regarding float- DSQRP: 9 steps ing point.
PULSE-P Flags
Zero M8020 Borrow M8021

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

X3 X10 X7

[S] SQR K5

[D] D2

Operation 1: This instruction performs a square root operation on source data (S) and stores the result at destination device (D). The operation is conducted entirely in whole integers rendering the square root answer rounded to the lowest whole number. For example, if (S) = 154, then (D) is calculated as being 12. M8020 is set ON when the square root operation result is equal to zero. Answers with rounded values will activate M8021.

M8023

DSQR M8000

D 30
M8023

Operation 2: This function is equivalent to FNC 127 ESQR This operation is similar to Operation 1. However, it is only activated when the mode setting float flag, M8023 is used. This then allows the SQR instruction to process answers in floating point format. The source data (S) must either be supplied in floating point format for data register use, or it can be supplied as a constant (K,H). When constants are used as a source, they are automatically converted to floating point format. Operation 2 is only valid for double word (32 bit) operation, hence both (S) and (D) will be 32 bit values and the SQR instruction will be entered as DSQR or DSQRP. General note: Performing any square root operation (even on a calculator) on a negative number will result in an error. This will be identified by special M coil M8067 being activated: -168 = Error and M8067 will be set ON This is true for both operating modes.

5-63

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.5.10

FLT (FNC 49)

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic FLT FNC 49 (Floating point)

Function Used to convert data to and from floating point format D

Operands S D D

Program steps FLT, FLTP: 5 steps DFLT, DFLTP: 9 steps

M8023 = OFF data is converted from decimal to floating point format M8023 = ON data is converted from floating point format to decimal format

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Operation:
X15 X27 [S] FLT D15 [D] D2

M8023

FLT D100 D120 M8000

M8023

When the float instruction is used without the float flag (M 802 3 = OF F) th e so urce data (S) is converted in to an equivalent value stored in float format at the destination device (D). Please note that two consecutive devices (D and D +1 ) will be used to store the converted float number. This is true regardless of the size of the source data (S), i.e. whether (S) is a single device (16 bits) or a double device (32 bits) has no effect on the number of destination devices (D) used to store the floating point number. Examples:
Decimal source data (S) 1 -26700 404 Floating point destination value (D) 1 -2.67 104 4.04 102

5-64

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

MEMO

5-65

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

Applied Instructions:

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

FNC 00 - 09

Program Flow Move And Compare

5-4 5-16

FNC 10 - 19

FNC 20 - 29

Arithmetic And Logical Operations (+, -, , )

5-24

FNC 30 - 39

5-34 5-42 5-52 5-66 5-80 5-94 5-110 5-118 5-122 5-126 5-136 5-146 5-146 5-150

FNC 40 - 49

6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

FNC 50 - 59

FNC 60 - 69

FNC 70 - 79

FNC 80 - 89

FNC 110-129

FNC 130-139

FNC 140-149

FNC 150-159

FNC 160-169

FNC 170-179

FNC 180-189

FNC 220-249

5-66

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.6

High Speed Processing - Functions 50 to 59

Contents: Page REF REFF MTR HSCS HSCR HSZ SPD PLSY PWM PLSR Refresh Refresh and filter adjust Input matrix High speed counter set High speed counter reset High speed counter zone compare Speed detect Pulse Y output Pulse width modulation Ramp Pulse output FNC 55 FNC 56 FNC 57 FNC 58 FNC 59 5-57 5-60 5-61 5-62 5-63 FNC 50 FNC 51 FNC 52 FNC 53 FNC 54 5-53 5-53 5-54 5-55 5-56

DPPPP - A 32 bit mode instruction modified to use pulse (single) operation.

( - A repetitive instruction which will change the destination value on every scan unless
modified by the pulse function.

) - An operand which cannot be indexed, i.e. The addition of V or Z is either invalid or will
have no effect to the value of the operand.

5-67

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.6.1

REF (FNC 50)

Operands D

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic REF FNC 50 (Refresh)

Function Forces an immediate update of inputs or outputs as specified

Program steps REF, REFP: 5 steps

X, Y

Note: D should always be a multiple of 10, i.e. 00, 10, 20, 30 etc.

K, H

Note: n should always be a multiple of 8, i.e. 8, 16, 24, 32 etc.

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Operation: X0 Standard PLC operation processes output and input REF X 10 K 8 status between the END instruction of one program scan and step 0 of the following program scan. If an immediate update of the I/O device status is required the REF instruction is used. The REF instruction can only be used to update or refresh blocks of 8 (n) consecutive devices. The head address of the refreshed devices should always have its last digit as a 0 (zero), i.e. in units of 10.
[D] [n]

Note: A short delay will occur before the I/O device is physically updated, in the case of inputs a time equivalent to the filter setting, while outputs will delay for their set energized time.

5-68

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.6.2

REFF (FNC 51)

Operands n K, H,

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic REFF FNC 51 (Refresh and filter adjust)

Function Inputs are refreshed, and their input filters are reset to the newly designated value

Program steps REFF, REFFP: 3 steps

Note: n= 0 to 60 msec (0 = 50s) X000 to X007 (X000 to X017 for FX2N) are automatically designated when using this instruction

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Operation: X10 PLC s are provided with input filters to overcome REFF K 1 problems generated by mechanical switch gear. However, as this involves ensuring a steady input signal is received for a fixed time duration, the use of input filters slows down the PLC response times. For high speed applications, especially where solid state switching provides the input signal, input filter times may be reduced. The default setting for the input filters is approximately 10 msec. Using this instruction input filter times of 0 to 60 msec may be selected. The setting 0 (zero) is actually 50 sec. This is the minimum available setting. It is automatically selected when direct input, interrupts or high speed counting functions are used. The REFF instruction needs to be driven for each program scan if it is to be effective, otherwise, the standard 10 msec filter time is used.
[n]

5-69

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.6.3

MTR (FNC 52)

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic MTR FNC 52 (Input matrix)

Function Multiplexes a bank of inputs into a number of sets of devices. Can only be used ONCE

Operands S D1 Y D2 Y, M, S n K, H, X

Program steps MTR: 9 steps

Note: Note: These operands should always be n=2 to 8 a multiple of 10, i.e. 00, 10, 20, 30 etc.
PULSE-P Flags
Operation Complete M8029

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

This instruction allows a selection of 8 consecutive input devices (head address S) to be used multiple (n) times, i.e. each physical input has more than one, separate and quite different (D1) signal being processed. The result is stored in a matrix-table (head address D2).
MTR X 10 Y 20 M 30 K 3

M8000

[ S ] [ D1 ] [ D2 ] [ n ]

Operation:

Points to note: a) The MTR instruction involves high speed input/output switching. For this reason this instruction is only recommended for use with transistor output modules. b) For the MTR instruction to operate correctly, it must be driven continuously. It is recommended that special auxiliary relay M8000, the PLC RUN status flag, is used. After the completion of the first full reading of the matrix, operation complete flag M8029 is turned ON. This flag is automatically reset when the MTR instruction is turned OFF. c) Each set of 8 input signals are grouped into a bank (there are n number of banks). d) Each bank is triggered/selected by a dedicated output (head address D1). This means the quantity of outputs from D1, used to achieve the matrix are equal to the number of banks n. As there are now additional inputs entering the PLC these will each have a status which needs recording. This is stored in a matrix-table. The matrix-table starts at the head address D2. The matrix construction mimics the same 8 signal by n bank configuration. Hence, when a certain input in a selected bank is read, its status is stored in an equivalent position within the result matrix-table. e) The matrix instruction operates on an interrupt format, processing each bank of inputs every 20msec. This time is based on the selected input filters being set at 10msec. This would result in an 8 bank matrix, i.e. 64 inputs (8 inputs 8 banks) being read in 160msec. If high speed inputs (ex. X0) is specified for operand S, the reading time of each bank becomes only 10msec, i.e. a halving of the reading speed. However, additional pull down Matrix device resistors are required on the drive outputs to ensure the high speed reading does not detect 24V 0V S/S X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 any residual currents from the last operation. +V Y40 Y41 Y42 Y43 Y44 Y45 Y46 Y47 These should be placed in parallel to the input bank and should be of a value of approximately 3.3k, 0.5W. For easier use, high speed inputs Pull down should not be specified at S. resistors

5-70

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

f) Because this instruction uses a series of multiplexed signals it requires a certain amount of hard wiring to operate. The example wiring diagram to the right depicts the circuit used if the previous example instruction was programmed. As a general precaution to aid successful operation diodes should be places after each input device (see diagram opposite). These should have a rating of 0.1A, 50V.

Diode 0,1 A 50 V

2. Input devices 1.

g) Example Operation When output Y20 is ON only those inputs in the first bank are read. These results are then stored; 24V 0V S/S X10 X11 X12 X13 X14 X15 X16 X17 in this example, auxiliary coils M30 to M37. The Transistor output unit second step involves Y20 going OFF and Y21 (source) coming ON. This time only inputs in the second +V Y20 Y21 Y22 Y23 Y24 Y25 Y26 Y27 bank are read. These results are stored in devices M40 to M47. The last step of this example has Y21 going OFF and Y22 coming ON. This then allows all of the inputs in the third bank to be read and stored in devices M50 to M57. The processing of this instruction example would take 20 3 = 60msec. Notice how the resulting matrix-table does not use any of the P8 and P9 bit devices when state S or auxiliary M relays are used as the storage medium.

5-71

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.6.4

HSCS (FNC 53)

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic HSCS FNC 53 (High speed counter set)

Function Sets the selected output when the specified high speed counter value equals the test value

Operands S1 K, H, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z S2 C Note: C = 235 to 254, or available high speed counters n Y, M, S Interrupt pointers I010 to I060 can be set.

Program steps DHSCS: 13 steps

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Operation: The HSCS set, compares the current value of the selected high speed counter (S2)against a selected value (S 1 ). When the counters current value changes to a value equal to S1the device specified as the destination (D)is set ON. The example above shows that Y10 would be set ON only when C255s value stepped from 99-100 OR 101-100. If the counters current value was forced to equal 100, output Y10 would NOT be set ON.
DHSCS K100 C255 Y10

M8000

[ S1 ] [ S2 ] [ D ]

5-72

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

Points to note: a) It is recommended that the drive input used for the high speed counter functions; HSCS, HSCR, HSCZ is the special auxiliary RUN contact M8000. b) If more than one high speed counter function is used for a single counter the selected flag devices (D) should be kept within 1 group of 8 devices, i.e. Y0-7, M10-17. c) All high speed counter functions use an interrupt process, hence, all destination devices (D) are updated immediately. Note: For all units Max. 6 simultaneously active HSCS/R and HSZ instructions. Please remember that the use of high speed counter functions has a direct impact on the maximum allowable counting speed! See page 4-22 for further details.

Use of interrupt pointers

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

FX2N and FX2NC MPUs can use interrupt pointers I010 through I060 (6 points) as destination devices (D). This enables interrupt routines to be triggered directly when the value of the specified high speed counter reaches the value in the HSCS instruction.

5-73

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.6.5

HSCR (FNC 54)

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic HSCR FNC 54 (High speed counter reset)

Function Resets the selected output when the specified high speed counter equals the test value

Operands S1 K, H, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z S2 C Note: C = C235 to C255, or available high speed counters D Y, M, S C Note: If C, use same counter as S2

Program steps DHSCR: 13 steps

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Operation: The HSCR, compares the current value of the selected high speed counter (S 2 ) against a selected value (S 1 ). When the counters current value changes to a value equal to S 1, the device specified as the destination (D) is reset. In the example above, Y10 would be reset only when C255s value stepped from 199 to 200 or from 201 to 200. If the current value of C255 was forced to equal 200 by test techniques, output Y10 would NOT reset. For further, general points, about using high speed counter functions, please see the subsection Points to note under the HSCS (FNC 53). Relevant points are; a, b, and c. Please also reference the note about the number of high speed instructions allowable.
DHSCR K200 C255 Y10

M8000

[ S1 ] [ S2 ] [ D ]

5-74

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.6.6

HSZ (FNC 55)

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic HSZ FNC 55 (High speed zone compare)

S1 S2 K, H, Operation 1: The current value KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, of a high speed counter is checked T, C, D, V, Z against a specified range Operation 2: D K,H The designated Using range is held in a values data table driving from Y outputs directly 1 to 128 (deciOperation 3: mal) The designated range is held in a data table driving PLSY frequencies directly using D8132
32 BIT OPERATION

Function

Operands S3 C Note: C = 235 to 255,

Program steps D DHSZ: Y, M, S 17 steps Note: 3 consecutive devices are used M8130 (only) This flag can only be used with one DHSZ instr at a time M8132 (only) This flag can only be used with one

16 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Operation 1 - Standard: (Applicable to all units) This instruction works in exactly the same way as DHSZ K1000 K1200 C251 Y10 the standard ZCP (FNC11). The only difference is that the device being compared is a high speed counter (specified as S3). Also, all of the outputs (D) are updated immediately due to the interrupt operation of the DHSZ. It should be remembered that when a device is specified in operand D it is in fact a head address for 3 consecutive devices. Each one is used to represent the status of the current comparison, i.e. using the above example as a basis, Y10 (D) C251 is less than S1, K1000 (S3< S1) Y11 (D+1) C251 is greater than S1, K1000 but less than S2, K1200 (S3> S1, S3< S2) C251 is greater than S2, K1200 (S3> S2) Y12 (D+2)
M8000 [ S1 ] [ S2 ] [ S3 ] [ D ]

For further, general points, about using high speed counter functions please see the subsection Points to note under the HSCS (FNC 52). Relevant points are; a, b, and c. Please also reference the note about the number of high speed instructions allowable. Operation 2 - Using HSZ With A Data Table: (Applicable units: FX2N and FX2NC) Operation 2 is selected when the destination device (D) is assigned special M coil M8130. This then allows devices (S1, S2) to be used to define a data table using (S1) as the head address and (S2) as the number of records in the table - maximum number of records is 128. Each record occupies 4 consecutive data registers proportioned in the following manner (for a

single record of data registers D through D+3):

Single Record D, D+1 Data registers D+2 D+3 Used as a double (32 bit) data register to contain the comparison data Stores the I/O device number, in HEX, of the Y Output device to be controlled, i.e. H10=Y10. Note: Hex digits A through F are not used. Stores the action (SET/RESET) to be performed on the Output device D+2. Note: For a SET (ON) operation D+3 must equal 1, for a RESET (OFF) D+3 must equal 0.

5-75

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

The following points should be read while studying the example on the right of the page.

Please note, all normal rules associated with high speed counters still apply.
The data table is p rocessed on e record number at a time, i.e only 1 record is ever active as the comparison data. The currently active record number is stored in data register D8130. As the comparison value for the active record is reached, the assigned Y device is SET or RESET and the active Record number is incremented by 1. Once all records in a data table have been processed, the current record pointer (D8130) is reset to 0 (the table is then ready to process again) and the operation complete flag M8131 is set ON.

Record Comparison Selected 'Y' number value Output (lower/upper Device register) [D8130] [D, D+1] [D+2] 0 1 2 3 4 [D150, D151] K321 [D154, D155] K432 [D158, D159] K543 [D162, D163] K765 [D166, D167] K765 [D152] H10 (Y10) [D156] H10 (Y10) [D160] H10 (Y10) [D164] H10 (Y10) [D168] H37 (Y37)

SET/RESET 'Y'Device (1=SET, 0=RESET) [D+3] [D153] K1 [D157] K0 [D161] K1 [D165] K0 [D169] K1

If the high speed counter is reset (by program K9999 M8000 or hardware input), when it resumes counting C251 and reaches the first records comparison value, X17 the M8131 flag will be reset. Both the status of K5 DHSZ D150 C251 M8130 M8131 and contents of D8130 are not editable by the user. If the DHSZ instruction is turned C251 reset OFF then all associated flags are reset. Care should be exercised when resetting the 765 high speed counter or turning OFF the DHSZ 654 instruct as all associated Y output devices will 543 remain in their last state, i.e. if an output was 432 321 ON it will remain ON until independently reset by the user. Y10 Th e d ata w ith in ina ct ive re co rd s ca n b e Y37 changed during operation allowing data tables M8131 to be updated. Any change made is processed D8130 0 1 2 3 4 0 at the end of the current program scan. The HSZ instruction will continue to process only the active data record, i.e. it will not reset due to the updating of an inactive data record. When the DHSZ instruction is initially activated it will not process a comparison until the following program scan as the CPU requires a slight time delay to initialize the comparison table.
C251 - count value equals HSZ comparison value
ON OFF

5-76

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

Operation 3 - Combined HSZ and PLSY Operation: (Applicable units: FX2N and FX2NC) Operation 3 allows the HSZ and PLSY instructions to be used together as a control loop. This operation is selected when the destination device (D) is assigned special M coil M8132. This then allows devices (S1, S2) to be used to define a data table using (S1) as the head address and (S2) as the number of records in the table - maximum number of records is 128. Each record occupies 4 consecutive data registers (D through D+3) proportioned in to two 32 bit data areas. The first pair of data registers (D,D+1 ) contain the comparison value for use with the high s p e e d c o u n t e r. T h e s e c o n d pa i r o f d a ta registers (D +2 ,D +3 ) contain a value (from 0 to 1000) which represents an output frequency in Hz. This value is loaded in to special data register D8132 when the comparison made by the DHSZ instruction gives a TRUE output. Special data register D8132 can be used as the so u r ce d a ta f or a P L S Y (F N C 5 7 ) o ut p u t enabling the output to be varied with relative count data. As with Operation 2 only one record in the data table is active at any one time. The current Record number being processed is stored in data register D8131. To observe the current comparative value, data registers D8134 and D8135 should be monitored as a double word (32 bit) device. Once the final entry in the data table has been processed, the operation complete flag M8133 is set ON and the record counter (D8131) cycles back to the first record. It is recommended that if the high speed counter and PLSY operations form a closed loop that the last record entry in the data table is set to K0 for the comparison value and K0 for the PLSY output frequency. This will bring the controlled system to a stop and the Record number counter will not be able to cycle back to the start of the data table until the associated high speed counter is reset by either pro-gram or hardware methods. This situation can be easily monitored by checking the paired data registers D8134 and D8135 for the 0 value. It is recommended that the operation of the PLSY instruction is delayed for 1 scan to allow the DHSZ data table to be constructed on initial operation. A suggested program using a pulsed flag is shown in the example on this page.
Record number [D8131] 0 1 2 3 4 Comparison value (lower/upper register) [D, D+1] [D180, D181] K40 [D184, D185] K100 [D188, D189] K400 [D192, D193] K800 [D196, D197] K0 Output Frequency For PLSY Instruction [D+2, D+3] [D182, D183] K100 [D186, D187] K600 [D190, D191] K550 [D194, D195] K40 [D198, D199] K0

M8000 X17 DHSZ D180 K5

K9999 C251 C251 M8132 PLS M10 PLSY D8132 K0 Y7 M10

C251 - count value equals HSZ comparison value

C251 reset 800 400 100 40

D8132, output value in Hz for PLSY instruction

D8131 0 1 2 600 550 100 40

PLSY Output Frequency in Hz

5-77

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.6.7

SPD (FNC 56)

Operands S1 X0 to X5 S2 K, H, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z D

FX1S

FX1N FX2N FX2NC

Mnemonic SPD FNC 56 (Speed detection)

Function Detects the number of encoder pulses in a given time frame. Results can be used to calculate speed

Program steps SPD: 7 steps

T, C, D, Z (V) Note: 3 consecutive devices are used. In the case of D= Z monitor D8028, D8029 and D8030

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

X10

[ S1 ] [ S2 ] [ D ] SPD X 0 K100 D 0

Operation: The number of pulses received at S1 are counted and stored in D +1; this is the current count value. The counting takes place over a set time frame specified by S2 in msec. The time remaining on the current timed count, is displayed in device D +2. The number of counted pulses (of S1) from the last timed count are stored in D. The timing chart opposite shows the SPD operation in a graphical sense. Note: : Current count value, device D+1 : Accumulated/ last count value, device D : Current time remaining in msec, device D+2

X10 S1
2 1

S2 S2
3

Points to note: a) When the timed count frame is completed the data stored in D+1 is immediately written to D. D+1 is then reset and a new time frame is started. b) Because this is both a high speed and an interrupt process only inputs X0 to X5 may be used as the source device S1. However, the specified device for S1 must NOT coincide with any other high speed function which is operating, i.e. a high speed counter using the same input. The SPD instruction is considered to act as a single phase counter. c) Multiple SPD instructions may be used, but the identified source devices S1 restrict this to a maximum of 6 times. d) Once values for timed counts have been collected, appropriate speeds can be calculated using simple mathematics. These speeds could be radial speeds in rpm, linear speeds in M/ min it is entirely down to the mathematical manipulation placed on the SPD results. The following interpretations could be used; Linear speed N (km/h) = 3600 (D) n S2 60 (D) n S2 103

where n = the number of linear encoder divisions per kilometer. Radial speed N (rpm) = 103

where n = the number of encoder pulses per revolution of the encoder disk.

5-78

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.6.8

PLSY (FNC 57)

Operands S1 K, H, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z S2

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic PLSY FNC 57 (Pulse Y output)

Function Outputs a specified number of pulses at a set frequency

D Y Note: Y000 or Y001 only ).

Program steps PLSY: 7 steps DPLSY: 13steps

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Flags

Operation Complete M8029

Operation:
X10 [ S1 ] [ S2 ] [ D ] PLSY K1000 D 0 Y 0

A specified quantity of pulses S2 is output through devic e D at a spe cifie d fre quency S 1 . Th is instruction is used in situations where the quantity of outputs is of primary concern.

Points to note: a) FX1S/FX1N users may use frequencies of 1 to 132,767Hz (16-bit operation) and 1 to 100kHz (32-bit operation). FX2N/FX2NC users may use frequencies of 2 to 20kHz. b) The maximum number of pulses: 16 bit operation: 1 to 32,767 pulses, 32 bit operation: 1 to 2,147,483,647 pulses. Note: special auxiliary coil M8029 is turned ON when the specified number of pulses has been completed. The pulse count and completion flag (M8029) are reset when the PLSY instruction is de-energized. If 0" (zero) is specified the PLSY instruction will continue generating pulses for as long as the instruction is energized. c) A single pulse is described as having a 50% duty cycle. This means it is ON for 50% of the pulse and consequently OFF for the remaining 50% of the pulse. The actual output is controlled by interrupt handling, i.e. the output cycle is NOT affected by the scan time of the program. d) The data in operands S1 and S2 may be changed during execution. However, the new data in S2 will not become effective until the current operation has been completed, i.e. the instruction has been reset by removal of the drive contact. e) Two FNC 57 (PLSY) can be used at the same time in a program to output pulses to Y000 and Y001 respectively. Or, only one FNC 57 PLSY and one FNC 59 PLSR can be used together in the active program at once, again outputting independent pulses to Y000 and Y001. It is possible to use subroutines or other such programming techniques to isolate different instances of this instructions. In this case, the current instruction must be deactivated before changing to the new instance. f) Because of the nature of the high speed output, transistor output units should be used with this instruction. Relay outputs will suffer from a greatly reduced life and will cause false outputs to occur due to the mechanical bounce of the contacts. To ensure a clean output signal when using transistor units, the load current should be 200mA or higher with the FX2N Series. The load current should be 10 - 100mA with the FX1S/1N Series. It may be found that pull up resistors will be required. g) FX2N and FX2NC units can use the HSZ (FNC 55) instruction with the PLSY instruction when source device S1 is set to D8132. Please see page 5-59 for more details. h) FX2N and FX2NC units can monitor the number of pulses output to Y0 using devices D8140 and D8141, and the number of output pulses output to Y1 using devices D8142 and D8143. The total number of pulses output can be monitored using D8136 and D8137.

5-79

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.6.9

PWM (FNC 58)

Operands S1 K, H, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z Note: S1 S2 S2

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic PWM FNC 58 (Pulse width modulation)

Function Generates a pulse train with defined pulse characteristics

D Y Note: All units: Y000 or Y001 only )

Program steps PWM: 7 steps

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

X10

[ S1 ] [ S2 ] [ D ] PWM D10 K50 Y0

Operation: A continuous pulse train is output through device D when this instruction is driven. The characteristics of the pulse are defined as: The distance, in tim e (m sec), between two identical parts of consecutive pulses (S2). And how long, also in time (msec), a single pulse will be active for (S1).

S1 D S2

Points to note: a) Because this is a 16 bit instruction, the available time ranges for S1 and S2 are 1 to 32,767. b) A calculation of the duty cycle is easily made by dividing S1 by S2. Hence S1 cannot have a value greater than S 2 as this would mean the pulse is on for longer than the distance between two pulses, i.e. a second pulse would start before the first had finished. If this is programmed an error will occur. This instruction is used where the length of the pulse is the primary concern. c) The PWM instruction may only be used once in a users program. d) Because of the nature of the high speed output, transistor output units should be used with this instruction. Relay outputs will suffer from a greatly reduced life and will cause false outputs to occur due to the mechanical bounce of the contacts. To ensure a clean output signal when using transistor units, the load current should be 200mA or higher with the FX2N Series. The load current should be 10 - 100mA with the FX1S/1N Series. It may be found that pull up resistors will be required.

5-80

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.6.10

PLSR (FNC 59)

FX1S

FX1N FX2N FX2NC

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Flags

Operation Complete M8029

Mnemonic PLSR FNC 59 (Pulse ramp)

Function Outputs a specified number of pulses, ramping up to a set frequency and back down to stop

Operands S1 S2 S3 Y FX2N users: Y000 or Y001 only. D K, H, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z Note: S1 S2

Program steps PLSR: 9 steps DPLSR: 17 steps

Operation:
M54 PLSR K500 D0 K3600 Y00

A specified quantity of pulses S2 is output through device D. The output frequency is first ramped up in 10 steps to the maximum frequency S1 in acceleration time S3 ms, then ramped down to stop also in S3 ms. This instruction is used to generate simple acc/dec curves where the quantity of outputs is of primary concern.
[S1] 10 - 100,000 Hz

Hz 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 [S3] Max 5000 ms

1 2 3 Total [S2] Pulses 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 secs [S3] Max 5000 ms [S1]/10

Points to Note: a) FX2N/FX2NC users may use frequencies of 10 to 20,000Hz. FX1S/FX1N users may use frequencies of 10 to 100,000Hz. The frequency should be set to a multiple of 10. If not it will be rounded up to the next multiple of 10. The acceleration and deceleration steps are set to 1/10 of the maximum frequency. Take this in to consideration to prevent slipping, when using stepping motors. b) FX2N and FX2NC units with CPU of less than V3.00 and all FX1S, FX1N units, maximum number of pulses: 16 bit operation: 110 to 32,767 pulses, 32 bit operation: 110 to 2,147,483,647 pulses. Correct pulse output can not be guaranteed for a setting of 110 or less. FX2N and FX2NC units with CPU of V3.00 or greater, maximum number of pulses: 16 bit operation: 0 to 32,767 pulses, 32 bit operation: 0 to 2,147,483,647 pulses. A setting of 110 pulses or less, or a frequency of [S1]/10 will result in no acceleration.

5-81

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

c) The acceleration time must conform to the limitations described below. d) The output device is limited to Y000 or Y001 only and should be transistor type. e) Two FNC 59 (PLSR) can be used at the same time in a program to output pulses to Y000 and Y001 respectively. Or, only one FNC 57 PLSY and one FNC 59 PLSR can be used together in the active program at once, again outputting independent pulses to Y000 and Y001. It is possible to use subroutines or other such programming techniques to isolate different instances of this instructions. In this case, the current instruction must be deactivated before changing to the new instance. f) If the number of pulses is not enough to reach the maximum frequency then the frequency is automatically cut g) Special auxiliary coil M8029 turns ON when the specified number of pulses has been completed. The pulse count and completion flag (M8029) are reset when the PLSR instruction is de-energized. Acceleration time limitations The acceleration time S3 has a maximum limit of 5000 ms. However, the actual limits of S3 are determined by other parameters of the system according to the following 4 points. 1) Set S3 to be more than 10 times the maximum program scan time (D8012). If set to less than this, then the timing of the acceleration steps becomes uneven.

90000 5 S1

2) The following formula gives the minimum value for S3. 3) The following formula gives the maximum value for S3.

S2 S1

818

4) The pulse output always increments in 10 step up to the maximum frequency as shown on the previous page. If the parameters do not meet the above conditions, reduce the size of S1. Possible output frequency is limited to 2 to 20,000 Hz for FX2N/FX2NC, and 10 to 100,000Hz for FX1S/FX1N. If either the maximum frequency or the acceleration step size are outside this limit then they are automatically adjusted to bring the value back to the limit. If the drive signal is switch off, all output stops. When driven ON again, the process starts from the beginning. Even if the operands are changed during operation, the output profile does not change. The new values take effect from the next operation.

5-82

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

Applied Instructions:

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

FNC 00 - 09

Program Flow Move And Compare

5-4 5-16

FNC 10 - 19

FNC 20 - 29

Arithmetic And Logical Operations (+, -, , )

5-24

FNC 30 - 39

5-34 5-42 5-52 5-66 5-80 5-94 5-110 5-118 5-122 5-126 5-136 5-146 5-146 5-150

FNC 40 - 49

FNC 50 - 59

7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

FNC 60 - 69

FNC 70 - 79

FNC 80 - 89

FNC 110-129

FNC 130-139

FNC 140-149

FNC 150-159

FNC 160-169

FNC 170-179

FNC 180-189

FNC 220-249

5-83

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.7

Handy Instructions - Functions 60 to 69

Contents: Page IST SER ABSD INCD TTMR STMR ALT RAMP ROTC SORT Initial State Search Absolute Drum Incremental Drum Teaching Timer Special Timer - Definable Alternate State Ramp - Variable Value Rotary Table Control Sort Data FNC 60 FNC 61 FNC 62 FNC 63 FNC 64 FNC 65 FNC 66 FNC 67 FNC 68 FNC 69 5-67 5-69 5-70 5-71 5-72 5-72 5-73 5-73 5-75 5-77

DPPPP - A 32 bit mode instruction modified to use pulse (single) operation.

( - A repetitive instruction which will change the destination value on every scan unless
modified by the pulse function.

) - An operand which cannot be indexed, i.e. The addition of V or Z is either invalid or will
have no effect to the value of the operand.

5-84

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.7.1

IST (FNC 60)

Operands S1 X, Y, M, S, Note: uses 8 consecutive devices S2

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic IST FNC 60 (Initial state)

Function Automatically sets up a multi-mode STL operating system

Program steps

S, IST: Note: 7 steps FX0 users S20 to S63 FX0N users S20 to S127 FX users S20 to S899 D1must be lower than D2
PULSE-P

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

Operation:
M8000 [ S ] [ D1 ] [ D2 ] IST X20 S20 S40

This instruction automatically sets up a multi-mode STL operating system. This consists of variations of manual and automatic operation modes. Assigned devices Indirect user selected devices: S+0 Manual operation S+1 Zero return S+2 Step operation S+3 One cycle operation S+4 Cyclic operation S+5 Zero return start S+6 Automatic operation start S+7 Stop Initial states: S0 initiates manual operation S1 initiates zero return operation S2 initiates automatic operation General states: S10 to S19 zero return sequence D1 to D2 automatic return sequence Special bit flags: M8040 = ON STL state transfer is inhibited M8041 = ON initial states are enabled M8042 = Start pulse given by start input M8043 = ON zero return completed M8044 = ON machine zero detected M8047 = ON STL monitor enabled

Points to note: a) The IST instruction automatically assigns and uses many bit flags and word devices; these are listed in the boxed column on the right of this page. b) The IST instruction may only be used ONCE. It should be programmed close to the be ginn ing o f th e prog ram , be fore the controlled STL circuits. c) The required operation mode is selected by driving the devices associated with operands S+0 through to S+4 (5 inputs). None of the devices within this range should be ON at the same time. It is recommended that these inputs are selected through use of a rotary switch. If the currently selected operating mode is changed before the zero return complete flag (M8043) is set, all outputs will be turned OFF. d) The zero position is a term used to identify a datum position from where the controlled device, starts from and returns too after it has completed its task. Hence, the operating mode zero return , causes the controlled system to return to this datum.

The zero position is sometimes also referred to as a home position, safe position, neutral position or a datum position.

5-85

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

e) The available operating modes are split into two main groups, manual and automatic. There are sub-modes to these groups. Their operation is defined as: Manual Manual (selected by device S+0)- Power supply to individual loads is turned ON and OFF by using a separately provided means, often additional push buttons. Zero Return (selected by device S+1) -Actuators are returned to their initial positions when the Zero input (S+5) is given. Automatic One Step (selected by device S+2)- The controlled sequence operates automatically but will only proceed to each new step when the start input (S+6) is given. One Cycle (selected by device S+3) - The controlled actuators are operated for one operation cycle. After the cycle has been completed, the actuators stop at their zero positions. The cycle is started after a start input (S+6) has been given. A cycle which is currently being processed can be stopped at any time by activating the stop input (S+7). To restart the sequence from the currently paused position the start input must be given once more. Automatic (selected by device S+4)-Fully automatic operation is possible in this mode. The programmed cycle is executed repeatedly when the start input (S+6) is given. The currently operating cycle will not stop immediately when the stop input (S+7)is given. The current operation will proceed to then end of the current cycle and then stop its operation. Note: Start, stop and zero inputs are often given by additional, manually operated push buttons. Please note that the stop input is only a program stop signal. It cannot be used as a replacement for an Emergency stop push button. All safety, Emergency stop devices should be hardwired systems which will effectively isolate the machine from operation and external power supplies. Please refer to local and national standards for applicable safety practices.

5-86

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.7.2

SER (FNC 61)

Operands S1 S2 D KnY, KnM, KnS T, C, D Note: 5 consecutive devices are used

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic SER FNC 61 (Search a Data Stack)

Function

n K,H, D

Program steps SER, SERP: 9 steps

Generates a list KnX, KnY, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, KnM, KnS, of statistics about a single T, C, D T, C, D data value V, Z located/found in K, H a data stack

Note: n= 1~256 for 16 DSER, DSERP: bit operation 17 steps n= 1~128 for 32 bit operation

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

X72

[ S1 ] [ S2 ] [ D ] n SER D 50 K 20 D 35 K100

Operation: The SER instruction searches a defined data stack from head address S1, with a stack length n. The data searched for is specified in parameter S2 and the results of the search are stored at destination device D for 5 consecutive devices.
Device description

Destination device D D+1 D+2 D+3 D+4

Total number of occurrences of the searched value S2 (0 if no occurrences are found) The position (within the searched data stack) of the first occurrence of the searched value S2 The position (within the searched data stack) of the last occurrence of the searched value S2 The position (within the searched data stack) of the smallest value found in the data stack (last occurrence is returned if there are multiple occurrences of the same value) The position (within the searched data stack) of the largest value found in the data stack (last occurrence is returned if there are multiple occurrences of the same value)

Points to note: a) Normal rules of algebra are used to determine the largest and smallest values, i.e. -30 is smaller than 6 etc. b) If no occurrence of the searched data can be found then destination devices D, D+1 and D+2 will equal 0 (zero). c) When using data register s as the destination device D please remember that 16 bit operation will occupy 5 consecutive, data registers but 32 bit operation will occupy 10 data registers in pairs forming 5 double words. d) When multiple bit devices are used to store the result (regardless of 16 or 32 bit operation), only the specified size of group is written to for 5 consecutive occurrences, i.e. K1Y0 would occupy 20 bit devices from Y0 (K1 = 4 bit devices and there will be 5 groups for the 5 results). As the maximum data stack is 256 (0 to 255) entries long, the optimum group of bit devices required is K2, i.e. 8 bit devices.

5-87

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.7.3

ABSD (FNC 62)

Operands S1 KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, (in groups of 8) T, C, D C S2 D Y,M,S

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic ABSD FNC 62 (Absolute drum sequencer)

Function Generates multiple output patterns in response to counter data

n K,H

Program steps ABSD: 9 steps DABSD: 17 steps. see f).

Note: High speed counters are not allowed

16 BIT OPERATION 32 BIT OPERATION

Note: ) n Note: consecutive n 64 devices are used

PULSE-P

Operation:
X0 [ S1 ] [ S2 ] [ D ] [ n ] ABSD D300 C 0 M 0 K4

This instruction generates a variety of output patterns (there are n number of addressed outputs) in response to the current value of a selected counter, S2.

Points to note: a) The current value of the selected counter (S2) is compared against a user defined data table. This data table has a head address identified by operand S1. S1should always have an even device number. b) For each destination bit (D) there are two consecutive values stored in the data table. The first allocated value represents the event number when the destination device (D) will be turned ON. The second identifies the reset event. The data table values are allocated as a consecutive pair for each sequential element between D and D+n. c) The data table has a length equal to 2 n data entries. Depending on the format of the data table, a single entry can be one data word such as D300 or a group of 16 bit devices e.g. K4X000. d) Values from 0 to 32,767 may be used in the data table. e) The ABSD instruction may only be used ONCE. From the example instruction and the data table below, the following timing diagram for elements M0 to M3 can be constructed.
When counter S2 equals the value below, the destination device D is turned ON D300 - 40 D302 - 100 D304 - 160 D306 - 240 turned OFF D301 - 140 D303 - 200 D305 - 60 D307 - 280 Assigned destination device D M0 M1 M2 M3
40 140 100 60 160 240 280 200

Count value

M0 M1 M2 M3
0

ON
180

OFF
360

5-88

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.7.4

INCD (FNC 63)

Operands S1 KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, (in groups of 8) T, C, D S2 C Uses 2 consecutive counters D

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic INCD FNC 63 (Incremental drum sequencer)

Function Generates a single output sequence in response to counter data

n K,H

Program steps INCD: 9 steps

Y, M, S Note: n consecutive devices are used

Note: High speed counters are not allowed

16 BIT OPERATION 32 BIT OPERATION

Note: n 64

PULSE-P

Flags

Operation Complete M8029

Operation:
X0 [ S1 ] [ S2 ] [ D ] [ n ] INCD D300 C 0 M0 K4

This instruction generates a sequence of sequential output patterns (there are n number of addressed outputs) in response to the current value of a pair of selected counters (S2, S2+1).

Points to note: a) This instruction uses a data table which contains a single list of values which are to be selected and compared by two consecutive counters (S2and S2+1). The data table is identified as having a head address S1and consists of n data elements. b) Counter S2 is programmed in a conventional way. The set value for counter S2 MUST be greater than any of the values entered into the data table. Counter S2 counts a user event and compares this to the value of the currently selected data element from the data table. When the counter and data value are equal, S2 increments the count of counter S2+1and resets its own current value to 0 (zero). This new value of counter S2+1selects the new data element from the data table and counter S2now compares against the new data elements value. c) The counter S2+1 may have values from 0 to n. Once the nth data element has been processed, the operation complete flag M8029 is turned ON. This then automatically resets counter S2+1hence, the cycle starts again with data element S1+0. d) Values from 0 to 32,767 may be used in the data table. e) The INCD instruction may only be used ONCE in a program. From the example instruction and the data table identified left, the following timing diagram for elements M0 to M3 can be constructed.
Data table Data element D300 D301 D302 D303 Data value / count value for counter S2 20 30 10 40 Value of counter S2+1 0 1 2 3

X0 C0 C1 M0 M1 M2 M3 M8029 20 0 1 30 10 2 3

Cycle restarts

0 1

5-89

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.7.5

TTMR (FNC 64)

Operands D D K, H

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic TTMR FNC 64 (Teaching timer)

Function Monitors the duration of a signal and places the timed data into a data register

Program steps TTMR: 5 steps

Note: Note: 2 devices 16 bit words n= 0: (D) = (D+1) 1 are used D and D+1 n= 1: (D) = (D+1) 10 n= 2: (D) = (D+1) 100
PULSE-P

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

X10

[D] [n] TTMR D300 K 0

X10 Equivalet time data (n duration D+1), is stored in D

D301

Operation: The duration of time that the TTMR instruction is energized, is measured and stored in device D+1 (as a count of 100ms periods). The data value of D+1 (in secs), multiplied by the factor selected by the operand n, is moved in to register D. The contents of D could be used as the source data for an indirect timer setting or even as raw data for manipulation. When the TTMR instruction is de-energized D+1 is automatically reset (D is unchanged).

5-90

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.7.6

STMR (FNC 65)

Mnemonic STMR FNC 65 (Special timer) Function Provides dedicated off-delay, one shot and flash timers Operands S T Note: Timers 0 to 199 (100msec devices) n

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

D Y, M, S Note:uses 4 consecutive devices D+0to D+3

Program steps STMR: 7 steps

K, H

Note: n= 1 to 32,767

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

[S]

[n]

[D]

STMR T 10 K 100 M 0

X0 M0 M1 M2 M3

Operation: The designated timer Swill operate for the duration n with the operational effect being flagged by devices D+0to D+3. Device D+0is an off-delay timer, D+1is a one shot timer. When D+3 is used in the configuration below, D+1and D+2act in a alternate flashing sequence.
X0 M3 STMR T 10 K 100 M 0

X0 M2 M1(M3)

5-91

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.7.7

ALT (FNC 66)

Operands D

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic ALT FNC 66 (Alternate state)

Function The status of the Y, M, S assigned device is inverted on every operation of the instruction

Program steps ALT, ALTP: 3 steps

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Operation:
X0 [D] ALT M 0

The sta tus o f the destination device (D) is a l t e r n a t e d o n e v e r y o p e r a t i o n o f t h e A LT instruction. This means the status of each bit device will flipflop between ON and OFF. This will occur on every program scan unless a pulse modifier or a program interlock is used. The ALT instruction is ideal for switching between two modes of operation e.g. start and stop, on and off etc.

X0 M0

5-92

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.7.8

RAMP (FNC 67)

Operands S1 S2 D

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic RAMP FNC 67 (Ramp variable value)

Function Ramps a device from one value to another in the specified number of steps

Program steps RAMP: 9 steps

D Note: Device D uses two consecutive registers identified as D and D+1 these are read only devices.

K, H

Note: n= 1 to 32,767
Flags
Operation Complete M8029

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

[ S1 ] [ S2 ] [ D ] RAMP D 1 D2

[n]

Operation: The RAMP instruction varies a current value (D) between the data limits set by the user (S1and S2). The journey between these extreme limits takes n program scans. The current scan number is stored in device D+1. Once the current value of D equals the set value of S2the execution complete flag M8029 is set ON. The RAMP instruction can vary both increasing and decreasing differences between S1and S2.

D 3 K1000

[D] [S1] n S1 < S2

[S2] [S1]

[D] [S2] n S1 > S2

Points to note: a) FX2N and FX2NC users may set the operation mode of the RAMP instruction by controlling the state of special auxiliary relay M8026. When M8026 is OFF, the RAMP instruction will be in repeat mode. This means when the current value of D equals S2 the RAM P instruction will automatically reset and start again, i.e. the contents of D will be reset to that of S1 and the device D+1 (the number of current scans) will reset to 0 (zero). This is shown in the diagram opposite. When M8026 is set ON, users will be operating the RAMP instruction in Hold mode . This
X0 [S2] [S1] [D]

M8029

X0 [S2] [S1] M8029 [D]

5-93

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

means once the current value of D equals that of S2, the RAMP instruction will freeze in this state. This means the M8029 will be set ON for as long as the instruction remains energized and the value of D will not reset until the instruction is re-initialized, i.e. the RAMP instruction is turned from OFF to ON again. b) Users of FX1N and FX1S PLCs cannot change the operating mode of the RAMP instruction. For these PLCs the mode is fixed as in the same case as FX PLCs when M8026 has been set ON, i.e. HOLD mode. c) If the RAMP instruction is interrupted before completion, then the current position within the ramp is frozen until the drive signal is re-established. Once the RAMP instruction is redriven registers D and D+1 reset and the cycle starts from its beginning again. d) If the RAMP instruction is operated with a constant scan mode, i.e. D8039 is written to with the desired scan time (slightly longer than the current scan time) and M8039 is set ON. This would then allow the number of scans n (used to create the ramp between S1and S2) to be associated to a time. If 1 scan is equal to the contents of D8039 then the time to complete the ramp is equal to n D8039. The RAMP instruction may also be used with special M flags M8193 and M8194 to mimic the operation of the SER (FNC 61) and RS (FNC 80) respectively when being programmed on older versions of programming peripherals. See page 1-5 for more details.

5-94

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.7.9

ROTC (FNC 68)

Operands S D Note: uses 3 consecutive devices S+1 m1 m1 m2 K, H

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic ROTC FNC 68 (Rotary table control)

Function Controls a rotary tables movement is response to a requested destination/ position

D Y, M, S Note: uses 8 consecutive devices

Program steps ROTC: 9 steps

K, H

Note: m1= 2 to 32,767

Note: m2= 0 to 32,767

m1 m2

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Operation:
X10 [ S ] [ m1 ] [ m2 ] [ D ] ROTC D200 K10 K 2 M0

The ROTC instruction is used to aid the tracking and positional movement of the rotary table as it moves to a specified destination. Assigned devices Indirect user selected devices: D+0 A-phase counter signal - input D+1 B-phase counter signal - input D+2 Zero point detection - input D+3 High speed forward - output D+4 Low speed forward - output D+5 Stop - output D+6 Low speed reverse - output D+7 High speed reverse - output Rotary table constants: m1 Number of encoder pulses per table revolution m2 Distance to be travelled at low speed (in encoder pulses) Operation variables: S+0 Current position at the zero point READ ONLY S+1 Destination position (selected station to be moved to) relative to the zero point - User defined S+2 Start position (selected station to be moved) relative to the zero point -User defined

Points to note: a) This instruction has many automatically defined devices. These are listed on the right of this page. b) The ROTC instruction may only be used ONCE. c) The ROTC instruction uses a built in 2-phase counter to detect both movement direction and distance travelled. Devices D+0and D+1 are used to input the phase pulses, while device D+2is used to input the zero position on the rotary table. These devices should be programmed as shown in the example below (where the physical termination takes place at the associated X inputs).
X0 X1 X2 M0 M1 M2

The movement direction is found by checking the relationship of the two phases of the 2 phase counter, e.g.
A phase leads B phase A-phase B-phase A-phase B-phase

B phase leads A phase

5-95

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

d) When the zero point input (D+2) is received the contents of device S+0 is reset to 0 (zero). Before starting any new operation it is advisable to ensure the rotary table is initialized by moving the zero point drive dog or marker around to the zero point sensor. This could be considered as a calibration technique. The re-calibration of the rotary table should be carried out periodically to ensure a consistent/accurate operation. e) Devices D+3 to D+7 are automatically set by the ROTC instruction during its operation. These are used as flags to indicate the operation which should be carried out next. f) All positions are entered in the form of the required encoder pulses. This can be seen in the following example: - Example: A rotary table has an encoder which outputs 400 (m1) pulses per revolution. There are 8 stations (0 to 7) on the rotary table. This means that when the rotary table moves from one station to its immediately following station, 50 encoder pulses are counted. The zero position is station 0 (zero). To move the item located at station 7 to station 3 the following values must be written to the ROTC instruction: S+1=3 50 = 150 (station 3s position in encoder pulses from the zero point) S+2=7 50 = 350 (station 7s position in encoder pulses from the zero point) m1= 400 (total number of encoder pulses per rev) The rotary table is required approach the destination station at a slow speed starting from 1.5 stations before the destination. Therefore; m2= 1.5 50 = 75 slow speed distance either side of the destination station (in encoder

pulses)

5-96

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.7.10

SORT (FNC 69)

Operands S m1 K, H m2

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic SORT FNC 69 (SORT Tabulated Data)

Function D Data in a defined table can be ) sorted on selected fields while retaining record integrity

n K, H D

Program steps SORT: 11 steps

Note: m1= 1 to 32 m2= 1 to 6

Note: n = 1 to m2
PULSE-P Flags
Operation Complete M8029

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

This instruction constructs a data table of m 1 records with m 2 fields having a start or head address of S. Then the data in field nis sorted in to numerical order while retaining each individual records integrity. The resulting (new) data table is stored from destination device D.
SORT D100 K 4 K 3 D100 K 2

X21

[ S ] m1 m2 [ D ]

Operation:

Points to note: a) When a sort occurs each record is sorted in to ascending order based on the data in the selected sort field n. b) The source (S) and destination (D) areas can be the same BUT if the areas are chosen to be different, there should be no overlap between the areas occupied by the tables. c) Once the SORT operation has been completed the Operation Complete Flag M8029 is turned ON. For the complete sort of a data table the SORT instruction will be processed m1times. d) During a SORT operation, the data in the SORT table must not be changed. If the data is changed, this may result in an incorrectly sorted table. e) The SORT instruction may only be used ONCE in a program. From the example instruction and the data table below left, the following data manipulation will occur when n is set to the identified field Original
FIELD (m2) 1 1 R E C 2 O R 3 D (m1) 4 (D100) 32 (D101) 74 (D102) 100 (D103) 7 2 (D104) 162 (D105) 6 (D106) 80 (D107) 34 3 (D108) 4 (D109) 200 (D110) 62 (D111) 6 1 R E C 2 O R 3 D (m1) 4 1 (D100) 74 (D101) 7 (D102) 100 (D103) 32

Table1st table sort when n= 2

FIELD (m2) 2 (D104) 6 (D105) 34 (D106) 80 (D107) 162 3 (D108) 200 (D109) 6 (D110) 62 (D111) 4

2nd table sort when n=1

FIELD (m2) 1 1 R E C 2 O R 3 D (m1) 4 (D100) 7 (D101) 32 (D102) 74 (D103) 100 2 (D104) 34 (D105) 162 (D106) 6 (D107) 80 3 (D108) 6 (D109) 4 (D110) 200 (D111) 62

5-97

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

MEMO

5-98

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

Applied Instructions:

FX1S

FX1N FX2N FX2NC

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

FNC 00 - 09

Program Flow Move And Compare

5-4 5-16

FNC 10 - 19

FNC 20 - 29

Arithmetic And Logical Operations (+, -, , )

5-24

FNC 30 - 39

5-34 5-42 5-52 5-66 5-80 5-94 5-110 5-118 5-122 5-126 5-136 5-146 5-146 5-150

FNC 40 - 49

FNC 50 - 59

FNC 60 - 69

8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

FNC 70 - 79

FNC 80 - 89

FNC 110-129

FNC 130-139

FNC 140-149

FNC 150-159

FNC 160-169

FNC 170-179

FNC 180-189

FNC 220-249

5-99

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.8

External FX I/O Devices - Functions 70 to 79

Contents: Page TKY HKY DSW SEGD SEGL ARWS ASC PRFROM TO Ten Key Input Hexadecimal Input Digital Switch (Thumbwheel input) Seven Segment Decoder Seven Segment With Latch Arrow Switch ASCII Code Print To A Display Read From A Special Function Block Write To A Special Function Block Symbols list: D - Destination device. S - Source device. m, n- Number of active devices, bits or an operational constant. Additional numeric suffixes will be attached if there are more than one operand with the same function e.g. D1, S3 or for lists/tabled devices D3+0, S+9 etc. MSB - Most Significant Bit, sometimes used to indicate the mathematical sign of a number, i.e. positive = 0, and negative = 1. LSB - Least Significant Bit. Instruction modifications: PPP PPPP DPPP An instruction operating in 16 bit mode, where PPP identifies the instruction mnemonic. A 16 bit mode instruction modified to use pulse (single) operation. An instruction modified to operate in 32 bit operation. FNC 79 5-91 FNC 78 5-90 FNC 74 FNC 75 FNC 76 FNC 77 5-85 5-87 5-88 5-89 FNC 72 FNC 73 5-83 5-84 FNC 70 FNC 71 5-81 5-82

DPPPP - A 32 bit mode instruction modified to use pulse (single) operation.

( - A repetitive instruction which will change the destination value on every scan unless
modified by the pulse function.

) - An operand which cannot be indexed, i.e. The addition of V or Z is either invalid or will
have no effect to the value of the operand.

5-100

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.8.1

TKY (FNC 70)

Mnemonic TKY FNC 70 (Ten key input) Function Reads 10 devices with associated decimal values into a single number Operands S X, Y, M, S Note: uses 10 consecutive devices (identified as S+0 to S+9) D1 KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z Note: uses 2 consecutive devices for 32 bit operation

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

D2 Y, M, S Note: uses 11 consecutive devices (identified D2+0 to D2+10)

Program steps TKY: 7 steps DTKY: 13 steps

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

X30

[ S ] [ D1 ] [ D2 ] TKY X0 D 0 M 10

Operation: This instruction can read from 10 consecutive devices(S +0 to S +9 ) and will store an entered numeric string in device D1.

Points to note: a) When a source device becomes active its associated destination (bit) device D2 also becomes active. This destination device will remain active until another source device is operated. Each source device maps directly to its own D2 device, i.e. S+0 maps to D2+0, S+7 maps to D2+7 etc. These in turn, map directly to decimal values which are then stored in the destination data devices specified by D1. b) One source device may be active at any one time. The destination device D2+10 is used to signify that a key (one of the 10 source devices) has been pressed. D2+10 will remain active for as long as the key is held down. When the TKY instruction is active, every press of a key adds that digit to the stored number in D1. When the TKY is OFF, all of the D2 devices are reset, but the data value in D1 remains intact. c) When the TKY instruction is used with 16 bit operation, D1 can store numbers from 0 to 9,999 i.e. max. 4 digits. When the DTKY instruction is used (32 bit operation) values of 0 to 99,999,999 (max. 8 digits) can be accommodated in two consecutive devices D1and D1+1. In both cases if the number to be stored exceeds the allowable ranges, the highest digits will overflow until an allowable number is reached. The overflowed digits are lost and can no longer be accessed by the user. Leading zeros are not accommodated, i.e. 0127 will actually be stored as 127 only. d) The TKY instruction may only be used ONCE. e) Using the above instruction as a brief example: If the keys identified (a) to (d) are pressed in that order the number 2,130 will be entered into D1. If the key identified as (e) is then pressed the value in D1 will become 1,309. The initial 2 has been lost.
Input 'keys'and their decimal values 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 (d) (b) (a) (c) (e)
24V 0V S/S X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 X11

X0 X1 X2 X3 M10 M11 M12 M13 . . . (a) (c) (b)

(d)

Example key connections

M20

(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)

5-101

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.8.2

HKY (FNC 71)

Operands S X, Note: uses 4 consecutive devices D1 Y, Note: uses 4 consecutive devices D2

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic HKY FNC 71 (Hexadecimal key input)

Function Multiplexes inputs and outputs to create a numeric keyboard with 6 function keys

D3 Y, M, S Note: uses 8 consecutive devices

Program steps HKY: 9 steps DHKY: 17 steps

T, C, D, V, Z Note: uses 2 consecutive devices for 32 bit operation

PULSE-P

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

Flags

Operation Complete M8029

Operation 1 - Standard:
X4 [ S ] [ D1 ] [ D2 ] [ D3 ] HKY X0 Y0 D0 M0

This instruction creates a multiplex of 4 outputs (D 1 ) and 4 inputs (S) to read in 16 different devices. Decimal values of 0 to 9 can be stored while 6 further function flags may be set.

Points to note: a) Each of the first 10 multiplexed source devices (identified as 0 to 9) map directly to decimal values 0 to 9. When entered, i.e. a source device is activated, then its associated decimal value is added to the data string currently stored in D2. Activation of any of these keys causes bit device D3+7 to turn ON for the duration of that key press. b) The last 6 multiplexed source devices (identified as function keys A to F) are used to set bit devices D3+0 to D3+5 respectively. These bit flags, once set ON, remain ON until the next function key has been activated. Activation of any of these keys causes bit device D3+6 to turn ON for the duration of that key press. c) In all key entry cases, when two or more keys are pressed, only the key activated first is effective. When the pressing of a key is sensed the M8029 (execution complete flag) is turned ON. When the HKY instruction is OFF, all D3 devices are reset but data value D2 remains intact. d) When the HKY instruction is used with 16 bit operation, D2 can store numbers from 0 to 9,999 i.e. max. 4 digits. When the DHKY instruction is used (32 bit operation) values of 0 to 99,999,999 (max. 8 digits) can be accommodated in two consecutive devices D2 and D2+1. In both cases if the number to be stored exceeds the allowable ranges, the highest digits will overflow until an allowable number is reached. The over-flowed digits are lost and can no longer be accessed by the user. Leading zeros are not accommodated, i.e. 0127 will actually be stored as 127 only. This operation is similar to that of the TKY instruction.
C D 9 5 1
X1 X2

E A 6 2
X3

F B 7 3

Input keys0-9,A-F

8 4 0

24V 0V S/S X0

Transistor Outputs (source)

+V Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3

5-102

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

e) The HKY instruction may only be used ONCE. f) Normal operation requires 8 scans to read the key inputs. To achieve a steady and repeatable performance, constant scan mode should be used, i.e. M8039 is set ON and a user defined scan time is written to register D8039. However, for a faster response the HKY instruction should be programmed in a timer interrupt routine as shown in the example opposite. Operation 2 - Using the HKY Instruction With M8167: (Applicable units: FX2N and FX2NC) When the HKY instruction is used with flag M8167 ON (as shown right), the operation of keys A through F allow actual entry of the Hexadecimal values of A through F respectively into the data device D2. This is in addition to the standard 0 through 9 keys. All other operation is as specified in Operation 1 - Standard. Maximum storage values for this operation become FFFF in 16 bit mode and FFFFFFFF in 32 bit (double word) mode.
EI I 610 M8000 HKY X0 FEND REF Y0 REF X0 D0 Y0 K8 M0 K8 IRET END

X17

M8167 HKY X 10 Y 60 D 5 M90 These two program examples perform the same task.

X17

SET M8167 HKY X 10 Y 60 D 5 M90 RST M8167

5-103

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.8.3

DSW (FNC 72)

Operands S X Note: If n=2 then 8 devices else 4. D1 Y Note: D2

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic DSW FNC 72 (Digital switch)

Function Multiplexed reading of n sets of digital (BCD) thumbwheels

Program steps DSW: 9 steps

T, C, D, V, Z K, H Note: If ) uses 4 n=2 then 2 Note: consecutive devices n= 1 or 2 devices else 1.

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Flags

Operation Complete M8029

Operation:
X0 [ S ] [ D1 ] [ D2 ] [ n ] DSW X 10 Y 10 D 0 K1

This instruction multiplexes 4 outputs (D1) through 1 or 2(n) sets of switches. Each set of switches consists of 4 thumbwheels providing a single digit input.

Points to note: a) When n = 1 only one set of switches are read. The multiplex is completed by wiring the thumbwheels in parallel back to 4 consecutive inputs from the head address specified in operand S. The (4 digit) data read is stored in data device D2. Continued on next page...
BCD digital switches (1st set) 10 4
0

10 3

10 2

10 1

2nd switch set inputs

1 2 4 8 X14 X15 X16 X17

1 2 4 8 24V 0V S/S X10 X11 X12 X13

Transistor Outputs (source)

+V Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13

5-104

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

b) When n= 2, two sets of switches are read. This configuration requires 8 consecutive inputs taken from the head address specified in operand S. The data from the first set of switches, i.e. those using the first 4 inputs, is read into data device D2. The data from the second set of switches (again 4 digits) is read into data device D2+1. c) The outputs used for multiplexing (D1) are cycled for as long as the DSW instruction is driven. After the completion of one reading, the execution complete flag M8029 is set. The number of outputs used does not depend on the number of switches n. d) If the DSW instruction is suspended during midoperation, when it is restarted it will start from the beginning of its cycle and not from its last status achieved. e) It is recommended that transistor output units are used with this instruction. However, if the program technique at the right is used, relay output units can be successfully operated as the outputs will not be continually active. f) The DSW instruction may be used TWICE on FX2N & FX 2NC controllers. FX 1S & FX 1N units can operate an Unlimited number of DSW instructions.
Start of repetitive operation Restart X0 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 M8029 Cycle complete Suspended operation

X0 M0 M8029

SET DSW X 10 Y 10 D 0 RST

M0 K1 M0

5-105

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.8.4

SEGD (FNC 73)

Operands S K, H KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z Note: Uses only the lower 4 bits

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic SEGD FNC 73 (Seven segment decoder)

Function Hex data is decoded into a format used to drive seven segment displays

D KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z Note: The upper 8 bits remain unchanged

Program steps SEGD, SEGDP: 5 steps

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Flags

Zero M8020

[S] [D] SEGD D 0 K2Y0

Operation: A sin gle he xa de cim al dig it (0 to 9, A to F) occupying the lower 4 bits of source device S is decoded into a data format used to drive a seven segment display. A representation of the hex digit is then displayed. The decoded data is stored in the lower 8 bits of destination device D. The upper 8 bits of the same device are not written to. The diagram opposite shows the bit control of the seven segment display. The active bits correspond to th os e se t t o 1 in th e lo w er 8 b its o f th e destination device D.

B0 B5 B6 B1 B4 B3 B2

It can be seen that B7 is NOT used. Hence B7 of the destination device D will always be OFF,

5-106

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.8.5

SEGL (FNC 74)

Operands S K, H KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS T, C, D, V, Z D Y Note: n = 0 to 3, 8 outputs are used n = 4 to 7, 12 outputs are used

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic SEGL FNC 74 (Seven segment with latch)

Function Writes data to multiplexed single digit displays - 4 digits per set, max. 2 sets

Program steps

SEGL: K, H, ) 7 steps Note: n= 0 to 3, 1 set of 7 Seg active n= 4 to 7, 2 sets of 7 Seg active

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Flags

Operation Complete M8029

This instruction takes a source decimal value (S) and writes it to a set of 4 multiplexed, outputs (D). Because the logic used with latched seven segment displays varies between display manufactures, this instruction can be modified to suit most logic requirements. Configurations are selected depending on the value of n, see the following page.
SEGL D 0 Y0 K4

[S] [D] [n]

Operation:

Points to note: a) Data is written to a set of multiplexed outputs (D+0 to D+7, 8 outputs) and hence seven segment displays. A set of displays consists of 4 single digit seven segment units. A maximum of two sets of displays can be driven with this instruction. When two sets are used the displays share the same strobe outputs (D +4 to D +7 are the strobe outputs). An additional set of 4 output devices is required to supply the new data for the second set of displays (D+10 to D+13, this is an octal addition). The strobe outputs cause the written data to be latched at the seven segment display. b) Source data within the range of 0 to 9,999 (decimal) is written to the multiplexed outputs. When one set of displays are used this data is taken from the device specified as operand S. When two sets of displays are active the source device S+1 supplies the data for the second set of displays. This data must again be within the range 0 to 9,999. When using two sets of displays the data is treated as two separate numbers and is not combined to provide a single output of 0 to 99,999,999. c) The SEGL instruction takes 12 program scans to complete one output cycle regardless of the number of display sets used. On completion, the execution complete flag M8029 is set. Note: A single set of strobe signals are always used regardless of the number of display sets.
Transistor Output (Source)
+V0 Y0 1 Y1 2 Y2 4 Y3 +V1 8 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 +V2 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 1 2 4 8

1 2 4 8

10 10

1 V+ 2 4 8

10 10

V+

In this example it has been assumed that the seven segment displays accept data HIGH inputs and latch when a HIGH signal is received

BCD data signals

Display set 1

Display set 2

5-107

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

d) If the SEGL instruction is suspended during mid-operation, when it is restarted it will start from the beginning of its cycle and not from its last status achieved. e) The SEGL instruction may be used TWICE on FX2N & FX2NC controllers. FX1S & FX1N units can operate an Unlimited number of SEGL instructions. Selecting the correct value for operand n The selection of parameter n depends on 4 factors; 1) The logic type used for the PLC output 2) The logic type used for the seven segment data lines 3) The logic type used for the seven segment strobe signal
Device considered Positive logic Source output
+V1 HIGH Y 0V Pull-down V+

Negative logic Sink output

Pull-up resistor V+ Y

PLC Logic

LOW

COM

With a source output, when the With a sink output, when the output output is HIGH the internal logic is 1 is LOW the internal logic is 1 Seven segment Display logic Strobe Data is latched and held when this signal logic signal is HIGH, i.e. its logic is 1 Data Active data lines are held HIGH, signal logic i.e. they have a logic value of 1 Data is latched and held when this signal is LOW, i.e. its logic is 1 Active data lines are held LOW, i.e. they have a logic value of 1

There are two types of logic system available, positive logic and negative logic. Depending on the type of system, i.e. which elements have positive or negative logic the value of n can be selected from the table below with the final reference to the number of sets of seven segment displays being used:
PLC Logic Positive (Source) Negative (Sink) Positive (Source) Negative (Sink) Positive (Source) Negative (Sink) Positive (Source) Negative (Sink) Seven segment display logic Data Logic Positive (High) Negative (Low) Positive (High) Negative (Low) Positive (High) Negative (Low) Positive (High) Negative (Low) Strobe logic Positive (High) Negative (Low) Negative (Low) Positive (High) Negative (Low) Positive (High) Positive (High) Negative (Low) 1 display set 0 1 2 3 n 2 display sets 4 5 6 7

5-108

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.8.6

ARWS (FNC 75)

Operands S X, Y, M, S Note: uses 4 consecutive devices D1 T, C, D, V, Z Note: data is stored in a decimal format D2

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic ARWS FNC 75 (Arrow switch)

Function Creates a user defined, (4 key) numeric data entry panel

n K, H

Program steps ARWS: 9 steps

Y Note: uses 8 consecutive devices

Note: n= 0 to 3,

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

This instruction displays the contents of a single data device D1on a set of 4 digit, seven segment displays. The data within D 1 is actually in a standard decimal format but is automatically converted to BCD for display on the seven segment units. Each digit of the displayed number can be selected and edited. The editing procedure directly changes the value of the device specified as D1.
ARWS X 10 D 0 Y0 K0

[ S ] [ D1 ] [ D2 ] [ n ]

Operation:

Points to note: a) The data stored in destination device D1can have a value from the range 0 to 9,999 (decimal), i.e. 4 digit data. Each digits data value, can be incremented (S+1) or decremented (S+0) by pressing the associated control keys. The edited numbers automatically wrap-around from 9 - 0 - 1 and 1 -0 - 9. The digit data is displayed by the lower 4 devices from D2, i.e. D2+0 to D2+3. b) On initial activation of the ARWS instruction, the digit in the numeric position 10 3 is currently selected. Each digit position can be sequentially cursored through by moving to the left (S+2) or to the right (S+3). When the last d i g i t i s r e a c h e d , t h e A RW S in s tr u c t io n autom atically wraps the cursor position around, i.e. after position 103, position 10 0 is selected and vice-versa. Each digit is physically selected by a different strobe output.
Increase digit value (S+1)
X11

Cursor left (S+3)

X13 X10

X12

Cursor right (S+2)

Decrease digit value (S+0)

Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7

Additional indicator lamps -see point c. 10

Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3

1 2 4 8

10 10

Digit position

c) To aid the user of an operation panel controlled with the ARWS instruction, additional lamps could be wired in parallel with the strobe outputs for each digit. This would indicate which digit was currently selected for editing. d) The parameter n has the same function as parameter n of the SEGL instruction - please see page5-86, Selecting the correct value for operand n. Note: as the ARWS instruction only controls one set of displays only values of 0 to 3 are valid for n. e) The ARWS instruction can be used ONCE. This instruction should only be used on transistor output PLCs.

5-109

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.8.7

ASC (FNC 76)

Operands S Alphanumeric data e.g. 0-9, A - Z and a - z etc. Note: Only one, 8 character string may be entered at any one time.

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic ASC FNC 76 (ASCII code conversion)

Function An entered alphanumeric string can be converted to its ASCII codes

D1 T, C, D Note: uses 4 consecutive devices

Program steps ASC : 7 steps

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

The source data string S consists of up to 8 ch a r a c te r s ta k e n fr o m t h e p ri n ta b le A S C I I character (Char) set. If less than 8 Char are used, the difference is made up with null Char (ASCII 00). The source data is converted to its associated ASCII codes. The codes are then stored in the destination devices D, see example shown below.
ASC F X - 6 4 M R ! D300

[S]

[D]

Operation:

D D300 D301 D302 D303

Byte High 58 (X) 36 (6) 4D (M) 21 (!) Low 46 (F) 2D (-) 34 (4) 52 (R)

Note: ASCII Char cannot be entered from a hand held programmer.

5-110

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.8.8

PR (FNC 77)
Operands S T, C, D
Note: 8 byte mode (M8027=OFF) uses 4 consecutive devices 16 byte mode (M8027= ON) uses 8 consecutive devices

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic PR FNC 77 (Print)

Function Outputs ASCII data to items such as display units

Program steps

PR: Y Note: uses 5 steps 10 consecutive devices.

Flags
Operation Complete M8029

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Source data (stored as ASCII values) is read byte by byte from the source data devices. Each byte is m a p p e d d i re c t l y t o t h e f ir s t 8 c o n s e c u t iv e destination devices D+0 to D+7). The final two destination bits provide a strobe signal (D +10, numbered in octal) and an execution/busy flag (D+11, in octal).
PR D300 Y 0

[S]

[D]

Operation:

Points to note: a) The source byte-data maps the lowest bit to the first destination device D+0. Consequently the highest bit of the byte is sent to destination device D+7. b) The PR instruction may only be used TWICE in a sequence program. This instruction should only be used on transistor output PLCs. The PR instruction will not automatically repeat its operation unless the drive input has been turned OFF and ON again. c) The operation of the PR instruction is program scan dependent. Under standard circumstances it takes 3 program scans to send 1 byte. However, for a faster operation the PR instruction could be written into a timer interrupt routine similar to the one demonstrated for HKY on page 5-82. d)8 byte operation has the following timing diagram. It should be noted that when the drive input (in the example X0) is switched OFF the PR instruction will ce as e o pe ra tion . Whe n it is r es ta rte d th e P R instruction will start from the beginning of the message string. Once all 8 bytes have been sent the execution/busy flag is dropped and the PR instruction suspends operation. e) 16 byte operation requires the special auxiliary flag M8027 to be driven ON (it is recommended that M8000 is used as a drive input). In this operation mode the drive input (in the example X0) does not have to be active all of the time. Once the PR instruction is activated it will operate continuously until all 16 bytes of data have been sent or the value 00H (null) has been sent. Once the operation is complete the execution/busy flag (D +11 , octal) is turned OFF and M8029 the execution complete flag is set.
Note:To=scan time, see note c. X0 Y0 - Y7 F
T0 T0

(D+0 - D+7)

X
T0

(D+10) (D+11)

Y10 Y11

Note:To=scan time, see note c. X0 Y0 - Y7

(D+0 - D+7)

Y10 Y11

(D+10) (D+11)

M8029

5-111

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.8.9

FROM (FNC 78)

Operands m1 m2 D

FX1S

FX1N FX2N FX2NC

Program steps FROM, FROMP: 9 steps DFROM, DFROMP: 17 steps

Mnemonic FROM FNC 78 (FROM)

Function Read data from the buffer memories of attached special function blocks

n K, H ) Note: 16 bit op: n= 1 to 32 32 bit op: n= 1 to 16

KnY, KnM, K, H ) K, H ) KnS, T, C, Note: Note: m1= 0 to 7 m2 = FX(2C) D, V, Z 0 to 31, FX2N 0 to 32767

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

The FROM instruction reads n words of data starting from the buffer memory address m2 of the special function block with the logical block position specified as m1, The read data is stored in the PLC at head address D for n word devices.
FROM K2 K10 D10 K6

[ m1 ][ m2 ] [ D ] [ n ]

Operation:

Points to note: a) All special function blocks which are addressable with the FROM/TO instructions are connected to the extension bus on the right hand side of the PLC. Each special function block can be inserted at any point within the chain of extended units (as long as the system configuration rules are not broken). Each special function block is consecutively addressed from 0 to 7 beginning with the one closest to the base unit.
Special function block 0 FX-80MR Output block Special function Special function Y50-57 block 1 block 2
24V A-D
24V D-A

FX-4AD
POWER
CH1 CH2 READY CH3 CH4

FX-8EYT
POWER

FX-1HC
POWER

FX-2DA
POWER CH1 READY CH2 OFFSET GAIN UP DOWN

OFFSET GAIN

b) Each special function unit has different buffer memory registers. These often have a dedicated use for each individual unit. Before any reading or writing of data is undertaken ensure that the correct buffer memory allocations for the unit used are known. m2: This defines the head address of the (special function blocks) buffer memories being accessed. m2 may have a value from the range 0 to 31. n: This identifies the number of words which are to be transferred between the special function block and the PLC base unit. n may have a value of 1 to 31 for 16 bit operation but a range of 1 to 16 is available for 32 bit operation. c) The destination head address for the data read FROM the special function block is specified under the D operand; and will occupy n further devices. d) This instruction will only operate when the drive input is energized.
5-112

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

e) Users of all PLC models have the option of allowing interrupts to occur immediately, i.e. during the operation of the FROM/TO instructions or to wait until the completion of the current FROM/ TO instruction. This is achieved by controlling the special auxiliary flag M8028. The following table identifies certain points associated with this control and operation.
Interruption Disabled M8028 = OFF Jumps called by interrupt operation are delayed until the completion of the data transfer of the FROM/TO instruction Interruption Enabled M8028 = ON Jumps called by interrupt operation occur immediately

Data transfer will resume upon return from the A small delay of (800m +200) sec can be expected in the worst case. Note: m = the number interrupt program. This may not be desirable if a FROM/TO instruction has been programmed of 32 bit words within the called interrupt Ensures that FROM/TO instructions included in an interrupt program will not interact with others elsewhere M8028 should only be used when a very short delay is required in applications where timing and accuracys are important

Users of FX1S have no option for interruption of the FROM/TO instructions and hence always operate in a mode equivalent to having M8028 switched OFF.

5-113

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.8.10

TO (FNC 79)
Operands m1 m2 K, H ) Note: m2 = 0 to 32767 S K,H, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z

FX1S

FX1N FX2N FX2NC

Program steps TO, TOP: 9 steps DTO, DTOP: 17 steps

Mnemonic TO FNC 79 (TO)

Function

n K, H ) Note: 16 bit op: n= 1 to 32 32 bit op: n= 1 to 16

Writes data to the K, H ) buffer memories Note: of attached m1= 0 to 7 special function blocks

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

X0 TO

[ m1 ][ m2 ] [ S ] [ n ] H2 K10 D20 K1

Operation: The TO instruction writes n words of data to the head buffer memory address m 2 of the special function block with the logical block position specified in m1. The written data is taken from the PLCs head address S for n word devices.

Points to note: All points are the same as the FROM instruction (see previous page) except point c) which is replaced by the following: a) The source head address for the data written TO the special function block is specified under the S operand.

5-114

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

MEMO

5-115

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

Applied Instructions:

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

FNC 00 - 09

Program Flow Move And Compare

5-4 5-16

FNC 10 - 19

FNC 20 - 29

Arithmetic And Logical Operations (+, -, , )

5-24

FNC 30 - 39

5-34 5-42 5-52 5-66 5-80 5-94 5-110 5-118 5-122 5-126 5-136 5-146 5-146 5-150

FNC 40 - 49

FNC 50 - 59

FNC 60 - 69

FNC 70 - 79

9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

FNC 80 - 89

FNC 110-129

FNC 130-139

FNC 140-149

FNC 150-159

FNC 160-169

FNC 170-179

FNC 180-189

FNC 220-249

5-116

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.9

External FX Serial Devices - Functions 80 to 89

Contents: Page RS PRUN ASCI HEX CCD VRRD VRSD PPP PID PPP RS Communications FX2-40AP Parallel Run Hexadecimal to ASCII ASCII to Hexadecimal Check Code FX-8AV Volume Read FX-8AV Volume Scale Not Available PID Control Loop Not Available FNC 80 FNC 81 FNC 82 FNC 83 FNC 84 FNC 85 FNC 86 FNC 87 FNC 88 FNC 89 5-102 5-95 5-96 5-98 5-99 5-100 5-101 5-101

DPPPP - A 32 bit mode instruction modified to use pulse (single) operation.

( - A repetitive instruction which will change the destination value on every scan unless
modified by the pulse function.

) - An operand which cannot be indexed, i.e. The addition of V or Z is either invalid or will
have no effect to the value of the operand.

5-117

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.9.1

RS (FNC 80)
Operands S D (including file registers) m K, H, D D D

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic RS FNC 80 (Serial Communications instruction)

Function Used to control serial communications from/to the programmable controller

n K, H, D

Program steps RS: 9 steps

m = 1 to 256, FX2N 1 to 4096.

m = 1 to 256, FX2N 1 to 4096

Zero M8020

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Flags

Borrow M8021 Carry M8022

[S] RS D10

[m] K5

[D] D20

[n] K5

Operation: This instruction performs the direct control of communications over FX and FX0N communication adapters which connect to the left hand port of the Main Processing Unit, i.e. FX 0N -232ADP, FX232ADP etc. Assigned devices
Data devices:
D8120 - Contains the configuration parameters for communication, i.e. Baud rate,Stop bits etc. Full details over the page D8122 - Contains the current count of the number of remaining bytes to be sent in the currently transmitting message. D8123 - Contains the current count of the number of received bytes in the incoming message. D8124 - Contains the ASCII code of the character used to signify a message header - default is STX, 02 HEX. D8125 - Contains the ASCII code of the character used to signify a message terminator -default is ETX, 03 HEX.

Points to note: a) This instruction has many automatically defined devices. These are listed in the boxed column to the right of this page. b) The RS instruction has two parts, send (or transmission) and receive. The first elements of the RS instruction specify the transmission data buffer (S) as a head address, which contains m number of elements in a sequential stack. The specification of the receive data area is contained in the last two parameters of the RS instruction. The destination (D) for received messages has a buffer or stack length of n data elements. The size of the send and receive buffers dictates how large a single message can be. Buffer sizes may be updated at the following times: 1) Transmit buffer - before transmission occurs, i.e. before M8122 is set ON 2) Receive buffer - after a message has been received and before M8123 is reset. c) Data cannot be sent while a message is being received, the transmission will be delayed - see M8121. d) More than one RS instruction can be programmed but only one may be active at any one time. e) Refer to the FX Communications Manual when using this function

Operational flags:
M8121 - This flag is ON to indicate a transmission is b e i n g d e l a y e d u n t i l t h e c u r r e n t r e c e iv e operation is completed. M8122 - This flag is used to trigger the transmission of data when it is set ON. M8123 - This flag is used to identify (when ON) that a complete message has been received. M8124 - Carrier detect flag. This flag is for use with FX and FX2C Main Processing Units. It is typically useful in modem communications M8161 - 8 or 16 bit operation mode ON = 8 bit mode where only the lower 8 bits in each source or destination device are used, i.e. only one ASCII character is stored in one data register OFF = 16bit mode where all of the available source/ destination register is used, i.e. two ASCII characters are stored in each data register.

5-118

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.9.2

RUN (FNC 81)

Operands S KnX, KnM

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic

Function

D KnY, KnY

Program steps PRUN, PRUNP: 5 steps DPRUN, DPRUNP: 9 steps

PRUN Used to control FNC 81 the FX parallel (Parallel run) link adapters: FX2-40AW/AP

Note: n = 1 to 8 For ease and convenience, the head address bit should be a multiple of 10, e.g. X10, M100, Y30 etc.
PULSE-P

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

[S]

[D]

Operation: This instruction is used with the FX parallel link adapters. It allows source data to be moved into the bit transmission area. The actual control of the parallel link communication is by special M flags.

PRUN K2X10 K2M810

Points to note: a) Parallel link communications automatically take place when both systems are linked and the Master station (M8070), Slave station flags (M8071) have been set ON (there is no need to have a PRUN instruction for communications). There can only be one of each type of station as this system connects only two FX PLC s. The programs shown opposite should be inserted into the appropriate FX PLCs programs.
Master FX PC M8000 M8070

Slave FX PC

M8000 M8071

Once the station flags have been set, they can only be cleared by either forcibly resetting them when the FX PLC is in STOP mode or turning the power OFF and ON again. b) During automatic communications the following data is swapped between the Master and Slave PLCs.
Master station Bit Data M800 to M899 (100 points) M8070 = ON M900 to M999 (100 points) Data words D490 to D499 (10 points) D500 to D509 (10 points) Communication direction Slave Station Bit Data M800 to M899 (100 points) M900 to M999 (100 points) M8071 = ON Data words D490 to D499 (10 points) D500 to D509 (10 points)

Continued...

5-119

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

c) The PRUN instruction enables data to be moved into the bit transmission area or out of the (bit) data received area. The PRUN instruction differs from the move statement in that it operates in octal. This means if K4X20 was moved using the PRUN instruction to K4M920, data would not be written to M928 and M929 as these devices fall outside of the octal counting system. This can be seen in the diagram below.
K4X20
X37 X36 X35 X34 X33 X32 X31 X30 X27 X26 X25 X24 X23 X22 X21 X20

K4M920
M937 M936 M935 M934 M933 M932 M931 M930 M929 M928 M927 M926 M925 M924 M923 M922 M921 M920

These devices are not written to with the PRUN instruction

d) For more information please see page 9-6.

5-120

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.9.3

ASCI (FNC 82)

Operands S K, H, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS T, C, D, V, Z D KnY, KnM, KnS T, C, D

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic ASCI FNC 82 (Converts HEX to ASCII)

Function Converts a data value from hexadecimal to ASCII

n K, H Note: n = 1 to 256

Program steps ASCI, ASCIP: 7 steps

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

[S] ASCI D8

[D] D20

[n] K6

Operation: Th is i ns tru c tio n re a d s n h e xa d ec im a l da ta characters from head source address (S) and converts them in to the equivalent ASCII code. This is then stored at the destination (D) for n number of bytes.

Points to note: Please note that data is converted as read, i.e. using the example above with the following data in (D9,D8) ABCDH,EF26H. Taking the first n hexadecimal characters (digits) from the right (in this case n= 6) and converting them to ASCI will store values in 6 consecutive bytes from D20, i.e. D20 = (67, 68), D21 = (69, 70) and D22 = (50, 54) respectively. In true characters symbols that would be read as CDEF26. This can be shown graphically as in the table Source (S) Data to the right. Please take special note that the A Destination ASCII Code b12-15 source data (S) read from the most significant Symbol (D) B HEX DEC device to the least significant. While the D9 b8-11 b4-7 b8-15 C 43 67 'C' destination data (D) is read in the opposite D20 b0-3 b0-7 D 44 68 'D' direction. b8-15 E 45 69 'E' The ASCI instruction can be used with the b12-15 D21 b0-7 F 46 70 'F' b8-11 M8161, 8 bit/16bit mode flag. The effect of this D8 b4-7 flag is exactly the same as that detailed on b8-15 2 32 50 '2' D22 b0-3 page 10-20. The example to the right shows b0-7 6 36 54 '6' the effect when M8161 is OFF. If M8161 was set ON, then only the lower destination byte (b0-7) would be used to store data and hence 6 data registers would be required (D20 through D25). ASCII Character Codes The table below identifies the usable hexadecimal digits and their associated ASCII codes
HEX Character 0 1 31 49 1 2 32 50 2 3 33 51 3 4 34 52 4 5 35 53 5 6 36 54 6 7 37 55 7 8 38 56 8 9 39 57 9 A 41 65 A B 42 66 B C 43 67 C D 44 68 D E 45 69 E F 46 70 F

ASCII HEX 30 Code DEC 48 Character Symbol 0

5-121

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.9.4

HEX (FNC 83)

Operands S D

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic HEX FNC 83 (Converts ASCII to HEX)

Function Converts a data value from ASCII in to a hexadecimal equivalent

Program steps HEX, HEXP: 7 steps

K, H, KnX, KnY, KnY, KnM, KnS K, H KnM, KnS T, C, D, V, Z T, C, D Note: n = 1 to 256

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Operation:
M10 [S] HEX [D] [n] K4 D50 D20

This instruction reads n ASCII data bytes from head source address (S) and converts them in to the equivalent Hexadecimal character. This is then stored at the destination (D) for n number of bytes.

Points to note: Please note that this instruction works in reverse to the ASCI instruction, i.e. ASCII data stored in bytes is converted into associated hexadecimal characters. The HEX instruction can be used with the M8161 8bit/16bit flag. In this case the source data (S)is read from either the lower byte (8bits) when M8161 is ON, or the whole word when M8161 is OFF i.e. using the example above with the following data in devices D50 and D51 respectively (43 H ,41 H ) (42H,31H) and assuming M8161 is ON. The ASCII data is converted to its hexadecimal equivalent and stored sequentially digit by digit from the destination head address. If M8161 had been OFF, then the contents of D20 would read CAB1H.
Source (S)
b8-15 b0-7 b8-15 b0-7

ASCII Code HEX DEC 43 41 42 31 67 65 66 49

Symbol 'C' 'A' 'B' '1'

Destination Data (D)

b12-15 b8-11

D51

A 1

D20
b4-7 b0-3

D50

For further details regarding the use of the HEX instruction and about the available ASCII data ranges, please see the following information point ASCII Character Codes under the ASCI instruction on the previous page. Important: If an attempt is made to access an ASCII Code (HEX or Decimal) which falls outside of the ranges specified in the table on previous page, the instruction is not executed. Error 8067 is flagged in data register D8004 and error 6706 is identified in D8067. Care should be taken when using the M8161 flag, and additional in the specification of the number of element n which are to be processed as these are the most likely places where this error will be caused.

5-122

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.9.5

CCD (FNC 84)

Operands S D

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic CCD FNC 84 (Check Code)

Function Checks the vertical parity of a data stack

Program steps CCD, CCDP: 7 steps

KnX, KnY, KnM, KnY, KnM, KnS K, H KnS T, C, D D T, C, D Note: n = 1 to 256

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Operation:
X0 [S] [D] [n] K6 CCD D100 D0

This instruction looks at a byte (8 bit) stack of data from head address (S)for n bytes and checks the vertical bit pattern for parity and sums the total data stack. These two pieces of data are then stored at the destination (D).

Points to note: a) The SUM of the data stack is stored at destination D while the Parity for the data stack is stored at D+1. b) During the Parity check an even result is indicated by the use of a 0 (zero) while an odd parity is indicated by a 1 (one). c) This instruction can be used with the 8 bit/ 16 bit mode flag M8161. The following results will occur under these circumstances. See page 10-20 for more details about M8161.
M8161=OFF Sourse (S) D100 D101 D102 H L H L H L FF FF FF 00 F0 0F 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 Bit patterm 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 3FC 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0

M8161=ON Sourse (S) D100 L D101 L D102 L D103 L D104 L D105 L Vertical party D1 SUM D0 FF 00 0F F0 F0 0F 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Bit patterm 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 2FD 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1

Vertical party D1 SUM D0

It should be noted that when M8161 is OFF n represents the number of consecutive bytes checked by the CCD instruction. When M8161 is ON only the lower bytes of n consecutive words are used. The SUM is quite simply a summation of the total quantity of data in the data stack. The Parity is checked vertically through the data stack as shown by the shaded areas.

5-123

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.9.6

VRRD (FNC 85)

Operands S K, H Note: S= 0 to 7
corresponding to the 8 available volumes on the FX-8AV

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic VRRD FNC 85 (Volume read)

Function Reads an analog value from 1 of 8 volume inputs on the FX-8AV

Program steps

KnY, KnM, KnS VRRD, T, C, D, V, Z VRRDP: 5 steps

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Operation:
X0 [S] VRRD K 0 [D] D0

The identified volume (S) on the FX-8AV is read as an analog input. The analog data is in an 8 bit format, i.e. values from 0 to 255 are readable. The read data is stored at the destination device identified under operand D.

Note: The FX-8AV volume inputs are able to be read in two formats, a) as an analog value and b) as an 11 (0 to 10) position rotary switch. The second use is described in the VRSC instruction (FNC 86).

5-124

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.9.7

VRSD (FNC 86)

Operands S K, H Note: S= 0 to 7 corresponding to the 8 available volumes on the FX-8AV

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic VRSC FNC 86 (Volume scale)

Function Reads the set position value, 0 to 10, from volume inputs on the FX-8AV

Program steps

KnY, KnM, KnS VRSC, T, C, D, V, Z VRSCP: 5 steps

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Operation:
X0 [S] VRSC K 1 [D] D1

The identified volume (S) on the FX-8AV is read as a rotary switch with 11 set positions (0 to 10). The position data is stored at device D as an integer from the range 0 to 10.

Note: The FX-8AV volume inputs are able to be read in two formats, a) as a 11 (0 to 10) position rotary switch and b) as an analog value. The second use is described in the VRRD

instruction (FNC 85).

5-125

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.9.8

PID (FNC 88)

Operands S1 D) S2 D) S3

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N FX2NC

Mnemonic PID FNC 88 (PID control loop) register each

Function Receives a data input and calculates a corrective action to a specified level based on PID control

D D) Note: D uses a single data register

Program steps PID: 9 steps

Note: S1 and S2 Note: S3 use a single uses 25 data register consecutive data registers

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Operation: This instruction takes a current value (S 2 ) and compares it to a predefined set value (S 1). The difference or error between the two values is then processed through a PID loop to produce a correction factor which also takes into account previous iterations and trends of the calculated error. The PID process calculates a correction factor which is applied to the current output value and stored as a corrected output value in destination device (D). The setup parameters for the PID control loop are stored in 25 consecutive data registers S3+0 through S3+24.
PID D18 D 19 D 20 D 46 X10 [ S1 ] [ S2 ] [ S3 ] [ D ]

Points to note: a) Every PID application is different. There will be a certain amount of trial and error necessary to set the variables at optimal levels. b) On FX2N, FX2NC & FX1N MPUs a Pre-tuning feature is available that can quickly provide initial values for the PID process. Refer to page 10-28 for more details. c) The FX1S does not have analog capabilities, it is therefore necessary to use RS232 communications to achieve basic PID operation. d) As 25 data register are required for the setup parameters for the PID loop, the head address of this data stack cannot be greater than D975. The contents of this data stack are explained later in this section. Multiple PID instructions can be programmed, however each PID loop must not have conflicting data registers. e) There are control limits in the PLC intended to help the PID controlled machines operate in a safe manner. If it becomes necessary to reset the Set Point Value (S1) during operation, it is recommended to turn the PID command Off and restore the command after entering the new Set Point Value. This will prevent the safety control limits from stopping the operation of the PID instruction prematurely. f) The PID instruction has a special set of error codes associated with it. Errors are identified in the normal manner. The error codes associated with the PID loop will be flagged by M8067 with the appropriate error code being stored in D8067. These error devices are not exclusive to the PID instruction so care should be taken to investigate errors properly. Please see chapter 6, Diagnostic Devices for more information. g) A full PID iteration does not have to be performed. By manipulation of the setup parameters P (proportional), I (Integral) or D (derivative) loops may be accessed individually or in a user defined/selected group. This is detailed later in this section.

5-126

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

PID Equations
Forward

PVnf > SV
TS - EV n + D n MV = K P ( EV n EV ( n 1 ) ) + ----T I EV n = PV nf SV TD KD T D - ( 2PV nf 1 + PV nf + PV nf 2 ) + ------------------------------ Dn 1 D n = -----------------------------TS + KD TD TS + KD TD MV n =

Reverse

SV > PVnf
TS - EV n + D n MV = K P ( EV n EV n 1 ) + ----T I EV n = SV PV nf TD KD TD - ( 2PV nf 1 PV nf PV nf 2 ) + ------------------------------ Dn 1 D n = -----------------------------TS + KD TD TS + KD TD MV n =

MV
Dn = the Derivative Value Dn-1 = the previous Derivative Value KP = the Proportion Constant = the Input Filter TS = the Sampling Time TI = the Integral Time Constant TD = the Time Derivative Constant KD = the Derivative Filter Constant

PVnf = PVn + (PVnf-1 - PVn) EVn = the current Error Value EVn-1 = the previous Error Value SV = the Set Point Value (S1) PVn = the current Process Value (S2) PVnf = the calculated Process Value PVnf-1 = the previous Process Value PVnf-2 = the second previous Process Value MV = the change in the Output Manipulation Values MVn = the current Output Manipulation Value (D)

Please see the Parameter setup section for a more detailed description of the variable parameters and in which memory register they must be set. Forward and Reverse operation (S3+1, b0) The Forward operation is the condition where the Process Value, PVnf, is greater than the Set Point, SV. An example is a building that requires air conditioning. Without air conditioning, the temperature of the room will be higher than the Set Point so work is required to lower PVnf. The Reverse operation is the condition where the Set Point is higher than the Process Value. An example of this is an oven. The temperature of the oven will be too low unless some work is done to raise it, i.e. - the heating element is turned On. The assumption is made with PID control that some work will need to be performed to bring the system into balance. Therefore, MV will always have a value. Ideally, a system that is stable will require a constant amount of work to keep the Set Point and Process Value equal.

5-127

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

PID setup parameters; S3 The PID setup parameters are contained in a 25 register data stack. Some of these devices require data input from the user, some are reserved for the internal operation and some return output data from the PID operation. Parameters S3+0 through S3+6 must be set by the user.
Parameter S3 + P S3+0 Parameter name/function Sampling time TS Description Setting range

S3+1

S3+2 S3+3

S3+4

S3+5

S3+6 S3+7 to S3+19 S3+20 S3+21

The time interval set between the reading the current 1 to 32767 Process Value of the system (PVnf) msec Forward operation(0), b0 Reverse operation (1) Action - reaction Process Value (PVnf) alarm enable, OFF(0)/ Not direction and b1 ON(1) applicable alarm control b2 Output Value (MV) alarm enable, OFF(0)/ON(1) b3 - 15 Reserved Input filter Alters the effect of the input filter. 0 to 99% This is a factor used to align the proportional output in a 1 to Proportional known magnitude to the change in the Process Value 32767% gain KP (PVnf). This is the P part of the PID loop. This is the I part of the PID loop. This is the time taken for the corrective integral value to Integral time (0 to 32767) reach a magnitude equal to that applied by the constant TI x 100 msec proportional or P part of the loop. Selecting 0 (zero) for this parameter disables the I effect. This is a factor used to align the derivative output in a Derivative known proportion to the change in the Process Value 1 to 100% gain KD (PVnf) This is the D part of the PID loop. is the time taken for the corrective derivative value to (0 to 32767) Derivative time This reach a magnitude equal to that applied by the constant TD x 10 msec proportional or P part of the loop. Selecting 0 (zero) for this parameter disables the D effect. Reserved for use for the internal processing This is a user defined maximum limit for the Process Value (PVnf). If the Process Value (PVnf) exceeds the limit, S3+24, bit b0 is set On. This is a user defined lower limit for the Process Value. If the Process Value (PVnf) falls below the limit, S3+24, bit b1 is set On. This is a user defined maximum limit for the 0 to 32767 Output Value, quantity of positive change which can occur in maximum Active one PID scan. If the Output Value (MV) exceeds positive change when this, S3+24, bit b2 is set On. S3+1, This is a user defined maximum limit for the b2 is Output Value, set ON. quantity of negative change which can occur in maximum one PID scan. If the Output Value (MV) falls negative change below the lower limit, S3+24, bit b3 is set On. b0 High limit exceeded in Process Value (PVnf) b1 Below low limit for the Process Value (PVnf) Not Alarm flags b2 Excessive positive change in Output Value (MV) applicable (Read Only) b3 Excessive negative change in Output Value (MV) b4 - 15 Reserved Process Value, Active maximum positive change when S3+1, Process Value, b1 is minimum value set ON.

S3+22

S3+23

S3+24

See Initial values for PID loops for basic guidance on initial PID values; page 5-114. See page 10-24 for additional parameters available with FX2N, FX2NC & FX1N MPUs.

5-128

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

Configuring the PID loop The PID loop can be configured to offer variations on PID control. These are as follows:
Control method P PI PD PID Selection via setup registers S3 +3 (KP) User value User value User value User value S3+ 4 (TI) Set to 0 (zero) User value Set to 0 (zero) User value S3 + 6 (TD) Set to 0 (zero) Set to 0 (zero) User value User value Description Proportional effect only Proportional and integral effect Proportional and derivative effect Full PID

It should be noted that in all situations there must be a proportional or P element to the loop. P - proportional change When a proportional factor is applied, it calculates the difference between the Current Error Value, EVn, and the Previous Error Value, EVn-1. The Proportional Change is based upon how fast the Process Value is moving closer to (or further away from) the Set Point Value NOT upon the actual difference between the PVnf and SV. Note: Other PID systems might operate using an equation that calculates the Proportional change based upon the size of the Current Error Value only. I - integral change Once a proportional change has been applied to an error situation, fine tuning the correction can be performed with the I or integral element. Initially only a small change is applied but as time increases and the error is not corrected the integral effect is increased. It is important to note how TI actually effects how fast the total integral correction is applied. The smaller TI is, the bigger effect the integral will have. Note: The TI value is set in data register S3+4. Setting zero for this variable disables the Integral effect. The Derivative Change The derivative function supplements the effects caused by the proportional response. The derivative effect is the result of a calculation involving elements TD, TS, and the calculated error. This causes the derivative to initially output a large corrective action which dissipates rapidly over time. The speed of this dissipation can be controlled by the value TD: If the value of TD is small then the effect of applying derivative control is increased. Because the initial effect of the derivative can be quite severe there is a softening effect which can be applied through the use of K D , the derivative gain. The action of K D could be considered as a filter allowing the derivative response to be scaled between 0 and 100%. The phenomenon of chasing, or overcorrecting both too high and too low, is most often associated with the Derivative portion of the equation because of the large initial correction factor. Note: The TD value is set in Data register S3+6. Setting zero for this variable disables the Derivative effect.

5-129

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

Effective use of the input filter S3+2 To prevent the PID instruction from reacting immediately and wildly to any errors on the Current Value, there is a filtering mechanism which allows the PID instruction to observe and account for any significant fluctuations over three samples. The quantitative effect of the input filter is to calculate a filtered Input Value to the PID instruction taken from a defined percentage of the Current Value and the previous two filtered Input Values. This type of filtering is often called first-order lag filter. It is particularly useful for removing the effects of high frequency noise which may appear on input signals received from sensors. The greater the filter percentage is set the longer the lag time. When the input filter is set to zero, this effectively removes all filtering and allows the Current Value to be used directly as the Input Value. Initial values for PID loops The PID instruction has many parameters which can be set and configured to the user s needs. The difficulty is to find a good point from which to start the fine tuning of the PID loop to the system requirements. The following suggestions will not be ideal for all situations and applications but will at least give users of the PID instruction a reasonable points from which to start. A value should be given to all the variables listed below before turning the PID instruction ON. Values should be chosen so that the Output Manipulated Value does not exceed 32767. Recommended initial settings: TS = Should be equal to the total program scan time or a multiple of that scan time, i.e. 2 times, 5 times, etc. = 50% KP = This should be adjusted to a value dependent upon the maximum corrective action to reach the set point - values should be experimented with from an arbitrary 75% TI = This should ideally be 4 to 10 times greater than the TD time KD = 50% T D = This is set dependent upon the total system response, i.e. not only how fast the programmable controller reacts but also any valves, pumps or motors. For a fast system reaction TD will be set to a quick or small time, this should however never be less than TS. A slower reacting system will require the TD duration to be longer. A beginning value can be TD twice the value of TS. Care should be taken when adjusting PID variables to ensure the safety of the operator and avoid damage to the equipment. On FX2N MPUs pre-tuning feature is available that can quickly provide initial values for the PID process. Refer to page 10-28 for more details. With ALL PID values there is a degree of experimentation required to tune the PID loop to the exact local conditions. A sensible approach to this is to adjust one parameter at a time by fixed percentages, i.e. say increasing (or decreasing) the KP value in steps of 10%. Selecting PID parameters without due consideration will result in a badly configured system which does not perform as required and will cause the user to become frustrated. Please remember the PID process is a purely mathematical calculation and as such has no regard for the quality of the variable data supplied by the user/system - the PID will always process its PID mathematical function with the data available.

5-130

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

Example PID Settings The partial program shown at below demonstrates which parameters must be set for the functioning of the FX2N. The first step sets the user values for S 3+0 to S 3+6. The PID instruction will be activated when M4 is On. From the PID instruction at the bottom of the ladder, S1 = D200; S2 = D201; S3 = D500; and D or MV = D525.

D500: Ts = 500 ms D501: Forward Operation, Alarms Not Enabled D502: Input Filter = 50% D503: KP = 75% D504: TI = 4000 ms D505: KD = 50% D506: TD = 1000 ms

M8002

FNC 12 MOV P FNC 12 MOV P FNC 12 MOV P FNC 12 MOV P FNC 12 MOV P FNC 12 MOV P FNC 12 MOV P

K500

D500

H0000 D501 K50 K75 K2000 K50 K3000 D502 D503 D504 D505 D506

M8002

D200: Set Point = 1000 D201: PVnf (an analog input value)
M1
FNC 79 TO FNC 78 FROM

FNC 12 MOV P

K 1000 D200

K2 K2 D200

K1 K5 D201

K4 D201 D500

K4 K4 D525

Begin the PID instruction D525: PID Output Value

FNC 88 PID

5-131

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

MEMO

5-132

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

Applied Instructions:

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

FNC 00 - 09

Program Flow Move And Compare

5-4 5-16

FNC 10 - 19

FNC 20 - 29

Arithmetic And Logical Operations (+, -, , )

5-24

FNC 30 - 39

5-34 5-42 5-52 5-66 5-80 5-94 5-110 5-118 5-122 5-126 5-136 5-146 5-146 5-150

FNC 40 - 49

FNC 50 - 59

FNC 60 - 69

FNC 70 - 79

FNC 80 - 89

10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

FNC 110-129

FNC 130-139

FNC 140-149

FNC 150-159

FNC 160-169

FNC 170-179

FNC 180-189

FNC 220-249

5-133

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.10

Floating Point 1 & 2 - Functions 110 to 129

Contents: Floating Point 1 ECMP EZCP 222 EBCD EBIN Floating Point 2 EADD ESUB EMUL EDIV 222 ESQR 222 INT Float Add Float Subtract Float Multiplication Float Division Not Available Float Square Root Not Available Float to Integer FNC 120 FNC 121 FNC 122 FNC 123 FNC 124 to 126 FNC 127 FNC 128 FNC 129 5-116 5-115 5-113 5-114 5-114 5-115 Float Compare Float Zone Compare Not Available Float to Scientific Scientific to Float FNC 110 FNC 111 FNC 112 to 117 FNC 118 FNC 119 5-112 5-112 Page 5-111 5-111

Symbols list: D - Destination device. S - Source device. m, n- Number of active devices, bits or an operational constant. Additional numeric suffixes will be attached if there are more than one operand with the same function e.g. D1, S3 or for lists/tabled devices D3+0, S+9 etc. MSB - Most Significant Bit, sometimes used to indicate the mathematical sign of a number, i.e. positive = 0, and negative = 1. LSB - Least Significant Bit. Instruction modifications: 222 222P D222 An instruction operating in 16 bit mode, where 222 identifies the instruction mnemonic. A 16 bit mode instruction modified to use pulse (single) operation. An instruction modified to operate in 32 bit operation.

D222P - A 32 bit mode instruction modified to use pulse (single) operation.

( - A repetitive instruction which will change the destination value on every scan unless
modified by the pulse function.

) - An operand which cannot be indexed, i.e. The addition of V or Z is either invalid or will
have no effect to the value of the operand.

5-134

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.10.1

ECMP (FNC 110)

Operands S1 S2

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic ECMP FNC 110 (Floating Point Compare)

Function Compares two floating point values - results of <, = and > are given

Program steps

DECMP, K, H - integer value automati- Y, M, S DECMPP: cally converted to floating point 13 steps Note: 3 consecutive D - must be in floating point devices are format (32bits). used.
PULSE-P

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

Operation:
M8000 [ S1 ]
DECMP D12

[ S2 ] D20

[D] M16

M16 D20 < D12 M17 D20 = D12 M18 D20 > D12

The data of S1 is compared to the data of S2. The result is indicated by 3 bit devices specified with the head address entered as D. The bit devices indicate: S2 is less than < S1 - bit device D is ON S2 is equal to = S1 - bit device D+1 is ON S2 is greater than > S1 - bit device D+2 is ON

Points to note: The status of the destination devices will be kept even if the ECMP instruction is deactivated. Full algebraic comparisons are used: i.e. -1.79 10 27 is smaller than 9.43 10 -15

5-135

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.10.2

EZCP (FNC 111)

Operands S1 S2 S3

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic EZCP FNC 111 (Floating Point Zone Compare)

Function Compares a float range with a float value - results of <, = and > are given

D Y, M, S

Program steps DEZCP, DEZCPP: 13 steps

K, H - integer value automatically converted to floating point

Note: 3 D - must be in floating point format consecutive (32 bits). devices are Note: S1 must be less than S2 used.

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Operation:
M8000 [ S1 ] [ S2 ] [ S3 ] [ D ] DEZCP D50 D60 D100 M50 M50 D100 < D50,D60 M51 D100 D50 D60 M52 D100 > D50,D60

The operation is the same as the ECMP instruction except that a single data value (S3) is compared to a data range (S1 - S2). S3 is less than S1 and S2 - bit device D is ON S3 is between S1 and S2 - bit device D+1 is ON S3 is greater than S2 - bit device D+2 is ON

5-136

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.10.3

EBCD (FNC 118)

Operands S

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic EBCD FNC 118 (Float to Scientific conversion)

Function

D D - 2 consecutive devices are used D - mantissa D+1 - exponent.

Program steps DEBCD, DEBCDP: 9 steps

Converts floating D - must be in floating point format (32 bits). point number format to scientific number format

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Operation:
X14
DEBCD D102

D200

Converts a floating point value at S into separate mantissa and exponent parts at D and D+1 (scientific format).

Points to note: a) The instruction must be double word format. The destinations D and D+1 represent the mantissa and exponent of the floating point number respectively. b) To provide maximum accuracy in the conversion the mantissa D will be in the range 1000 to 9999 (or 0) and the exponent D+1 corrected to an appropriate value. c) E.g. S= 3.4567 10 -5 will become D= 3456, D+1 = -8

5-137

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.10.4

EBIN (FNC 119)

Operands S

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic EBIN FNC 119 (Scientific to Float conversion)

Function

D D - a floating point value (32 bits).

Program steps DEBIN, DEBINP: 9 steps

Converts scientific D - 2 consecutive number format to devices are used floating point number format S- mantissa S+1 - exponent.

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Operation:
X15
DEBIN D202

D110

Generates a floating point number at D from scientific format data at source S.

Points to note: a) The instruction must be double word format. The source data Sand S+1 represent the mantissa and exponent of the floating point number to be generated. b) To provide maximum accuracy in the conversion the mantissa S must be in the range 1000 to 9999 (or 0) and the exponent S+1 corrected to an appropriate value. c) E.g. S= 5432, S+1 = 12 will become D= 5.432 x 10 9

5-138

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.10.5

EADD (FNC 120)

Operands S1 S2

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic EADD FNC 120 (Floating Point Addition)

Function Adds two floating point numbers together

Program steps DEADD, DEADDP: 13 steps

K, H - integer value automatically D - a floating point value converted to floating point (32 bits). D - must be in floating point format (32 bits).

Zero M8020

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Flags

Borrow M8021 Carry M8022

Operation:
X07
DEADD K52000 D106 D108

The floating point values stored in the source devices S1 and S2 are algebraically added and the result stored in the destination device D.

Points to note: a) The instruction must use the double word format; i.e., DEADD or DEADDP. All source data and destination data will be double word; i.e. uses two consecutive data registers to store the data (32 bits). Except for K or H, all source data will be regarded as being in floating point format and the result stored in the destination will also be in floating point format. b) If a constant K or H is used as source data, the value is converted to floating point before the addition operation. c) The addition is mathematically correct: i.e., 2.3456 10 2 + (-5.6 10 -1) = 2.34 10 2 d) The same device may be used as a source and as the destination. If this is the case then, on continuous operation of the DEADD instruction, the result of the previous operation will be used as a new source value and a new result calculated. This will happen every program scan unless the pulse modifier or an interlock program is used. e) If the result of the calculation is zero 0 then the zero flag, M8020 is set ON. If the result of the calculation is larger than the largest floating point number then the carry flag, M8021 is set ON and the result is set to the largest value. If the result of the calculation is smaller than the smallest floating point number then the borrow flag, M8022 is set ON and the result is set to the smallest value. For more information about the format of floating point number refer to page 4-46.

5-139

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.10.6

EAUB (FNC 121)

Operands S1 S2

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic ESUB FNC 121 (Floating Point Sub-traction)

Function Subtracts one floating point number from another

D D - a floating point value (32 bits).

Program steps DESUB, DESUBP: 13 steps

K, H - integer value automatically converted to floating point D - must be in floating point number format (32 bits).

Zero M8020

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Flags

Borrow M8021 Carry M8022

Operation:
X17
DESUB D120 K79124 D128

The floating point value of S2 is subtracted from the floating point value of S 1 and the result stored in destination device D.

Points to note: All points of the EADD instruction apply, except that a subtraction is performed. See page 5-122.

5-140

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.10.7

EMUL (FNC 122)

Operands S1 S2

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic EMUL FNC 122 (Floating Point Multiplication)

Function

D D - a floating point value (32 bits).

Program steps DEMUL, DEMULP: 13 steps

Multiplies two K, H - integer value automatifloating point cally numbers together converted to floating point D - must be in floating point format (32 bits).

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Operation:
M12
DEMUL D108 K1000 D130

The floating point value of S1is multiplied with the floating point value of S 2 . The result of the multiplication is stored at D as a floating point value.

Points to note: Point a, b, c and d of the EADD instruction apply, except that a multiplication is performed. See page 5-122.

5-141

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.10.8

EDIV (FNC 123)

Operands S1 S2

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic EDIV FNC 123 (Floating Point Division)

Function Divides one floating point number by another.

D D - a floating point value (32 bits).

Program steps DEDIV, DEDIVP: 13 steps

K, H - integer value automatically converted to floating point D - must be in floating point format (32 bits).

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Operation:
X10 DEDIV D128 K500 D106

The floating point value of S 1 is divided by the floating point value of S2. The result of the division is stored in D as a floating point value. No remainder is calculated.

Points to note: Points a, b, c, d of the EADD instruction apply, except that a division is performed. See page 5-122. If S2 is 0 (zero) then a divide by zero error occurs and the operation fails.

5-142

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.10.9

ESQR (FNC 127)

Operands S K, H - integer value automatically converted to floating point D - must be in floating point number format (32 bits).

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic ESQR FNC 127 (Floating Point Square Root)

Function Calculates the square root of a floating point value.

D D - a floating point value (32 bits).

Program steps DESQR, DESQRP: 9 steps

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Flags

Zero M8020

Operation:
M24
DESQR D302 D510

A square root is performed on the floating point value of Sand the result is stored in D.

Points to note: Points a, b, c, d of the EADD instruction apply, except that a square root is performed. See page 5-122. If S is negative then an error occurs and error flag M8067 is set ON.

5-143

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.10.10 INT (FNC 129)

Operands S D - must be in floating point number format (always 32 bits).

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic INT FNC 129 (Float to Integer)

Function Converts a number from floating point format to decimal format

D D - decimal format for INT, INTP - 16 bits for DINT, DINTP - 32 bits

Program steps INT, INTP: 5 steps DINT, DINTP: 9 steps

Zero M8020

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Flags

Borrow M8021 Carry M8022

Operation:
M25 DINT D510 D254

The floating point value of S is rounded down to the nearest integer value and stored in normal binary format in D.

Points to note: a) The source data is always a double (32 bit) word; a floating point value. For single word (16 bit) operation the destination is a 16 bit value. For double word (32 bit) operation the destination is a 32 bit value. b) This instruction is the inverse of the FLT instruction. (See page 5-49) c) If the result is 0 then the zero flag M8020 is set ON. If the source data is not a whole number it must be rounded down. In this case the borrow flag M8021 is set ON to indicate a rounded value. If the resulting integer value is outside the valid range for the destination device then an overflow occurs. In this case the carry flag M8022 is set on to indicate overflow. Note: If overflow occurs, the value in the destination device will not be valid.

5-144

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

Applied Instructions:

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

FNC 00 - 09

Program Flow Move And Compare

5-4 5-16

FNC 10 - 19

FNC 20 - 29

Arithmetic And Logical Operations (+, -, , )

5-24

FNC 30 - 39

5-34 5-42 5-52 5-66 5-80 5-94 5-110 5-118 5-122 5-126 5-136 5-146 5-146 5-150

FNC 40 - 49

FNC 50 - 59

FNC 60 - 69

FNC 70 - 79

FNC 80 - 89

FNC 110-129

11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

FNC 130-139

FNC 140-149

FNC 150-159

FNC 160-169

FNC 170-179

FNC 180-189

FNC 220-249

5-145

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.11

Trigonometry - FNC 130 to FNC 139

Contents: Floating point 3 SIN COS TAN 222 Sine Cosine Tangent FNC 130 FNC 131 FNC 132 Page 5-119 5-120 5-120

Not Available

FNC 133 to 139

Symbols list: D - Destination device. S - Source device. m, n- Number of active devices, bits or an operational constant. Additional numeric suffixes will be attached if there are more than one operand with the same function e.g. D1, S3 or for lists/tabled devices D3+0, S+9 etc. MSB - Most Significant Bit, sometimes used to indicate the mathematical sign of a number, i.e. positive = 0, and negative = 1. LSB - Least Significant Bit. Instruction modifications: 222 222P D222 An instruction operating in 16 bit mode, where 222 identifies the instruction mnemonic. A 16 bit mode instruction modified to use pulse (single) operation. An instruction modified to operate in 32 bit operation.

D222P - A 32 bit mode instruction modified to use pulse (single) operation.

( - A repetitive instruction which will change the destination value on every scan unless
modified by the pulse function.

) - An operand which cannot be indexed, i.e. The addition of V or Z is either invalid or will
have no effect to the value of the operand.

5-146

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.11.1

SIN (FNC 130)

Operands S D - must be in floating point number format (32 bits).(radians)

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic SIN FNC 130 (Sine)

Function Calculates the sine of a floating point value

D D - a floating point value (32 bits).

Program steps DSIN, DSINP: 9 steps

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

X03 DSIN D510 D314

Contents: This instruction performs the mathematical SIN operation on the floating point value in S. The result is stored in D.

Points to note: a) The instruction must use the double word format: i.e., DSIN or DSINP. All source and destination data will be double word; i.e., uses two consecutive data registers to store the data (32 bits). The source data is regarded as being in floating point format and the destination is also in floating point format. b) The source value must be an angle between 0 to 360 degrees in radians; i.e., 0 S< 360 Radian Angles Below is an program example of how to calculate angles in radians using floating point.
X001 X002 M8000 MOVP K45 MOVP K90 FLT D0 D0 D0 D4

K45 degrees to D0 K90 degrees to D0 Convert D0 to float in D4,D5 Calculate in radians (/180) Store as a float in D20,D21 Calculate angle in radians in D30,D31 (deg /180 = rads) Calculate SIN of angle in D100

DEDIV K31415926 K1800000000 D20

DEMUL

D4 DSIN

D20 [S] D30

D30 [D] D100

5-147

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.11.2

COS (FNC 131)

Operands S D - must be in floating point number format (32 bits).

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic COS FNC 131 (Cosine)

Function Calculates the cosine of a floating point value

D D - a floating point value (32 bits).

Program steps DCOS, DCOSP: 9 steps

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Contents:
X04 DCOS D510 D316

This instruction performs the mathematical COS operation on the floating point value in S. The result is stored in D.

Points to note: All the points for the SIN instruction apply, except that COS is calculated. See page 5-127.

5-148

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.11.3

TAN (FNC 132)

Operands S D - must be in floating point number format (32 bits).

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic TAN FNC132 (Tangent)

Function Calculates the tangent of a floating point value

D D - a floating point value (32 bits).

Program steps DTAN, DTANP: 9 steps

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Contents:
X05 DTAN D510 D318

This instruction performs the mathematical TAN operation on the floating point value in S. The result is stored in D.

Points to note: All the points for the SIN instruction apply, except that COS is calculated. See page 5-127.

5-149

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

Applied Instructions:

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

FNC 00 - 09

Program Flow Move And Compare

5-4 5-16

FNC 10 - 19

FNC 20 - 29

Arithmetic And Logical Operations (+, -, , )

5-24

FNC 30 - 39

5-34 5-42 5-52 5-66 5-80 5-94 5-110 5-118 5-122 5-126 5-136 5-146 5-146 5-150

FNC 40 - 49

FNC 50 - 59

FNC 60 - 69

FNC 70 - 79

FNC 80 - 89

FNC 110-129

FNC 130-139

12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

FNC 140-149

FNC 150-159

FNC 160-169

FNC 170-179

FNC 180-189

FNC 220-249

5-150

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.12

Data Operations 2 - FNC 140 to FNC 149

Contents: Page 222 SWAP 222 Not Available Float to Scientific Not Available FNC 140 to 146 FNC 147 FNC 148 to 149 5-123

Symbols list: D - Destination device. S - Source device. m, n- Number of active devices, bits or an operational constant. Additional numeric suffixes will be attached if there are more than one operand with the same function e.g. D1, S3 or for lists/tabled devices D3+0, S+9 etc. MSB - Most Significant Bit, sometimes used to indicate the mathematical sign of a number, i.e. positive = 0, and negative = 1. LSB - Least Significant Bit. Instruction modifications: 222 222P D222 An instruction operating in 16 bit mode, where 222 identifies the instruction mnemonic. A 16 bit mode instruction modified to use pulse (single) operation. An instruction modified to operate in 32 bit operation.

D222P - A 32 bit mode instruction modified to use pulse (single) operation.

( - A repetitive instruction which will change the destination value on every scan unless
modified by the pulse function.

) - An operand which cannot be indexed, i.e. The addition of V or Z is either invalid or will
have no effect to the value of the operand.

5-151

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.12.1

SWAP (FNC 147)

Operands S KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic SWAP FNC 147 (Byte Swap)

Function The high and low byte of the designated devices are exchanged

Program steps SWAP,SWAPP : 5 steps DSWAP, DSWAPP: 9 steps

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Contents:

X34

SWAPP

D10

The upper byte and the lower byte of the source device are swapped. This instruction is equivalent to operation 2 of FNC 17 XCH (see page 5-21).

Points to note: a) In single word (16 bit) operation the upper and lower byte of the source device are exchanged. b) In double word (32 bit) operation the upper and lower byte of each or the two 16 bit devices are exchanged. Result of DSWAP(P) D10:
Values are in Hex for clarity Before DSW AP After DSW AP D10 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 1 Byte 2 1FH 8BH C4H 35H 8BH 1FH 35H C4H

D11

c) If the operation of this instruction is allowed to execute each scan, then the value of the source device will swap back to its original value every other scan. The use of the pulse modifier or an interlock program is recommended.

5-152

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

MEMO

5-153

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

Applied Instructions:

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

FNC 00 - 09

Program Flow Move And Compare

5-4 5-16

FNC 10 - 19

FNC 20 - 29

Arithmetic And Logical Operations (+, -, , )

5-24

FNC 30 - 39

5-34 5-42 5-52 5-66 5-80 5-94 5-110 5-118 5-122 5-126 5-136 5-146 5-146 5-150

FNC 40 - 49

FNC 50 - 59

FNC 60 - 69

FNC 70 - 79

FNC 80 - 89

FNC 110-129

FNC 130-139

FNC 140-149

" 13.
14. 15. 16. 17.

FNC 150-159

FNC 160-169

FNC 170-179

FNC 180-189

FNC 220-249

5-154

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.13

Positioning Control - FNC 150 to FNC 159

Contents: Page 222 ABS ZRN PLSV DRVI DRVA Not Available Absolute current value read Zero return Pulse V Drive to increment Drive to absolute FNC 150 to 154 FNC 155 FNC 156 FNC 157 FNC 158 FNC 159 5-127 5-128 5-129 5-130 5-132

Symbols list: D - Destination device. S - Source device. m, n- Number of active devices, bits or an operational constant. Additional numeric suffixes will be attached if there are more than one operand with the same function e.g. D1, S3 or for lists/tabled devices D3+0, S+9 etc. MSB - Most Significant Bit, sometimes used to indicate the mathematical sign of a number, i.e. positive = 0, and negative = 1. LSB - Least Significant Bit. Instruction modifications: 222 222P D222 An instruction operating in 16 bit mode, where 222 identifies the instruction mnemonic. A 16 bit mode instruction modified to use pulse (single) operation. An instruction modified to operate in 32 bit operation.

D222P - A 32 bit mode instruction modified to use pulse (single) operation.

( - A repetitive instruction which will change the destination value on every scan unless
modified by the pulse function.

) - An operand which cannot be indexed, i.e. The addition of V or Z is either invalid or will
have no effect to the value of the operand.

5-155

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.13.1

Cautions when using Positioning Instructions

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

The following positioning instructions are application instructions that can be used many times in a program. When designing a program, make sure to follow the cautions outlined below with regard to instruction drive timing. FNC 156 (ZRN) FNC 157 (PLSV) FNC 158 (DRVI) FNC 159 (DRVA) Do not drive positioning instructions which use the same output relay (Y000 or Y001) at the same time. If such instructions are driven at the same time, they will be treated as double coils, and not function correctly. Before setting a drive contact ON after is has been set to OFF be sure that the following condition is satisfied; One or more operation cycles of the pulse output monitor (Y000:M8147, Y001:M8148) must occour after the positioning instruction is turned OFF, before it can be used again. This condition must be met, as one or more OFF operations are required for the redriving of a positioning instruction. If it is not met, and operation error will occour during the instruction execution. Use the Step Ladder Program to correctly set up positioning instructions in conformance to the cautions above. Caution when using Positioning instructions with FNC 57 (PLSY) & FNC 59 (PLSR) Pulse output instructions FNC 57 (PLSY) & FNC 59 (PLSR) use output points Y000 and Y001 in the same way as the positioning instructions described above. If a positioning and a pulse output instruction are used in the same operation, the conflicting instructions will be treated as double coils and not function correctly. It is recommended to use a FNC 158 (DRVI) instruction in place of either a FNC 57 (PLSY) or FNC 59 (PLSR) instruction to avoid incorrect operation when pulse outputs are required while positioning instructions are being used. Output terminals Y000 and Y001 are high speed response type Voltage range : 5 to 24V DC Current range : 10 to 100mA Output frequency : 100kHz or less

5-156

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.13.2

Pulse train settings

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

When a positioning operation is executed from the PLC, the pulse output signal has the Pulse train + Sign format during control, as shown in the figure below.
Pulse output from Y000 Arbitrary output relay Y (Specifies the direction.)

OFF

Pulse output from Y001 Arbitrary output relay Y (Specifies the direction.)

OFF

Make sure to set the pulse train input mode on the servo amplifier or stepper motor as follows; Pulse train input mode: Pulse train + Sign Pulse train logic: negative logic

5-157

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.13.3

Devices related to positioning

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Device No.

Data size

Initial value

Description Operates as current value registers of positioning instruction output to Y000 For FNC 157 (PLSV), FNC 158 (DRVI), FNC 159 (DRVA) instructions, current value increases or decreases in accordance with direction of rotation. Although FNC 57 (PLSY) and FNC 59 (PLSR) instructions use the same current value registers, the current value represents the accumulating total number of output pulses during instruction execution. Operates as current value registers of positioning instruction output to Y001 For FNC 157 (PLSV), FNC 158 (DRVI), FNC 159 (DRVA) instructions, current value increases or decreases in accordance with direction of rotation. Although FNC 57 (PLSY) and FNC 59 (PLSR) instructions use the same current value registers, the current value represents the accumulating total number of output pulses during instruction execution. Bias speed when FNC 156 (ZRN), FNC 158 (DRVI), FNC 159 (DRVA) instructions are executed Set range: 1/10 or less of maximum speed (D8146 & D8147) If the current value exceeds this range, it is automatically set to 1/10 of the maximum speed during operation.

D8140 Lower 32 bit D8141 Upper 0

D8142

Lowe r 32 bit 0

D8143 Upper

D8145

16 bit

D8146 Lower

Maximum speed when FNC 156 (ZRN), FNC 158 (DRVI), FNC 159 32 bit 100,000 (DRVA) instructions are executed. D8147 Upper Set range 10 to 100,000 (Hz). Acceleration/Deceleration time in which maximum speed (D8146 & D8147) is achieved from bias speed (D8145) when FNC 156 (ZRN), FNC 158 (DRVI), FNC 159 (DRVA) instructions are executed. Set range 50 to 5,000 (ms)

D8148

16 bit

100

Device No. M8145 M8146 M8147 M8148

Attribute Drive enable Drive enable Read only flag Read only flag

Description Y000 pulse output stop command (immediate stop) Y001 pulse output stop command (immediate stop) Y000 pulse output monitor (BUSY/READY) Y001 pulse output monitor (BUSY/READY)

5-158

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.13.4

Servo Wiring Example

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Example of connection to a Mitsubishi MR-J2-*A servo. Note. The PLC required for this connection is a SINK Transistor output type.
85V AC to 264V AC Construct a sequence in which MC is set to OFF by alarm or emergency stop. L N NFB MC Regenerative option

Servo motor HC-MF/HA-FF U V W E

200V AC to 230V AC

U L1 L2 V L3 W L11 PE L21 PE *2 CN2

PG Optional cable

X000 X001 X002 X003 X004 X005 X006 COM 24V COM 24+

Stop Return to zero point Jog (+) Jog (-) Positioning in normal rotation Positioning in reverse rotation Near point signal (DOG) CN1B SG 10 COM 13

*2 CN3 Optional cable

Personal computer

*4 Y000
COM0

Pulse train

CN1A PP 3 SG 10

CN1B 4 DO1 19 ZSP 6 TLC 10 SG 5 SON 8 ABSM 9 ABSR *2 CN1B COM ZSP TLC ALM CN1B EMG SON RES LSP LSN

Refer to FNC 155 ( D ABS).

Y001
COM1

Y002 Y003 Y004 Y005

COM2

Clear Normal/reverse sign

CR 8 SG 10 NP 2 SG 10 SD COM 9 OPC 11

13 19 6 18

Zero speed 1 Torque being limited 1 Failure

15 5 14 16 17

External emergency stop Servo ON *1 Reset Normal rotation limit Reverse rotation limit *3

20 SG Programmable controller FX1S-30MT Servo amplifier MR-J2-A

*1 Connect to programmable controller when absolute position detection is required. *2 Ports CN1A, CN1B, CN2 & CN3 are the same shape. Do not confuse them. *3 Connect a limit switch to the servo amplifier. *4 ONLY use a transistor output type PLC.
5-159

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.13.5

Example Program

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

The following example program for forward/reverse operation uses the I/O assignment shown in section 5.13.4 Servo Wiring Example. During operation positioning is performed using the absolute position method shown below.
500000 Output pulse frequency 100000Hz 100 Zero point Acceleration/ deceleration time 200ms 500Hz

500Hz

In this example the actual output frequency for the first step, acceleration, and the last step, deceleration, can be obtained using the following expression. A = Maximum speed (D8146, D8147) B = Acceleration/Deceration time

A ( 2 ( C 1000 ) ) = Output 100000 ( 2 ( 200 1000 ) ) = 500Hz

Step Ladder program.

X000 Stop M8000 RUN monitor S0 S10 S11 S12 S13 M8145

Output to the X-axis (Y000) is M8145 stopped. Return to the zero point with M8140 clear signal output is valid.

M5 Return to JOG(+) JOG(-) Positioning Positioning Y000 in normal in reverse output stop zero point rotation rotation M8002 *1 FNC 12 K100000 D8146 D MOV Initial pulse *1 FNC 12 MOV K200 D8148

Operation is stopped.

Sets the maximum speed. 100,000 (Hz) D8147 and D8146 Sets the acceleration/ deceleration time. 200 (ms) D8148

*1 When the maximum speed or Acceleration/deceleration do not have to be changed from their initial values, programming is not required.

5-160

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

X001 Return to zero point

M5 RST Operation being stopped RST M12 M10

Resets the zero point return completion flag. Resets the normal rotation positioning completion flag. Resets the reverse rotation positioning completion flag. Drives the zero point return state (S0). Resets the normal rotation positioning completion flag. Resets the reverse rotation positioning completion flag. Drives the jog (+) state (S10).

RST

M13

SET X002 JOG(+) *2 M5 RST Operation being stopped RST

M12

M13

SET X003 JOG(-) *2 M5 RST Operation being stopped RST

S10

M12

Resets the normal rotation positioning completion flag. Resets the reverse rotation positioning completion flag. Drives the jog (-) state (S11).

M13

SET X004 M5 M10 RST Positioning Operation Zero point in normal being return rotation completion flag stopped

S11

M12

Resets the normal rotation positioning completion flag. Resets the reverse rotation positioning completion flag. Drives the normal rotation positioning state (S12). Resets the normal rotation positioning completion flag. Resets the reverse rotation positioning completion flag. Drives the reverse rotation positioning state (S13).

RST

M13

SET X005 M5 M10 RST Positioning Operation Zero point in reverse being return rotation stopped completion flag

S12

M12

RST

M13

SET

S13

*2 The maximum size of a JOG command is 999,999 pulses, as this is the maximum number of output pulses for a FNC 158 (DRVI) instruction. If a greater distance is required execute more than one JOG command.

5-161

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

S0 Return to zero point Return to zero point

M50

FNC156 D ZRN

K50000

K5000

X006

Y000

Zero point return instruction Operates in the - direction.

Jog Zero point Creep operation return speed speed M8029 Execution completion flag M8147 Y000 being output M8000 RUN monitor SET M50

Near point signal (DOG) M10 Zero point return completion flag

RST *2 M50

Return to the zero point is finished (self-reset).

S10

X002 M51

JOG(+) JOG (+) Jog operation

FNC158 D DRVI

K999999 K30000
Number of Output output pulses pulse (maximum frequency value in + direction)

Y000

Y004

Pulse output Rotation destination direction signal No. output destination No.

Executes the jog operation in the + direction using the incremental positioning instruction. (Y004 is ON.)

M8147 Y000 being output M8000

M51

RST *2 M51

S10

The jog (+) operation is finished (self-reset).

RUN monitor S11 JOG(-) X003 M52 JOG (-) FNC158 K-999999 K30000 D DRVI
Number of Output output pulses pulse (maximum frequency value in direction)

Y000

Y004

Pulse output Rotation destination direction signal No. output destination No.

Executes the jog operation in the - direction using the incremental positioning instruction. (Y004 is OFF.)

M8147 Y000 being output M8000

M52

RST *2 M52

S11

The jog (-) operation is finished (self-reset).

RUN monitor

5-162

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

Positioning in normal rotation direction

S12

M53

FNC159 K500000 K100000 D DRVA

Y000

Y004

Absolute Output pulse Pulse output Rotation position frequency destination direction signal specification No. output destination No.

Moves to the absolute position "500,000" using the absolute positioning instruction. (Y004 is ON.)

M8029 Execution completion flag M8147 Y000 being output M8000 RUN monitor S13 M54 FNC159 D DRVA

SET M53

M12

Normal rotation positioning completion flag Positioning in the normal direction is finished (self-reset).

RST *3 M53

S12

Positioning in reverse rotation direction

K100

K100000

Y000

Y004

Absolute Output pulse Pulse output Rotation position frequency destination direction signal specification No. output destination No.

Moves to the absolute position "100" using the absolute positioning instruction. (Y004 is OFF.)

M8029 Execution completion flag M8147 Y000 being output M8000 RUN monitor

SET M54

M13

Reverse rotation positioning completion flag Positioning in the reverse direction is finished (self-reset).

RST *3 M54

S13

*3 The instruction drive timing is delayed by one opeation cycle to prevent simultaneous driving of positioning instructions.

5-163

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.13.6

ABS (FNC 155)

Operands S X,Y,M,S D1 Y,M,S

FX1S
Function Reads the absolute position from a servo motor

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic ABS FNC 155

Absolute current value read

D2 T,C,D,V,Z

Program steps DABS 13 steps

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

M0 DABS

[S] X000

[D1] Y004

[D2] D8140

Operation:

This instruction reads the absolute position data when a Mitsubishi servo motor, MR-H or MR-J2, equipped with absolute positioning function is connected. [S] is the first of three inputs used for communication flags (see drawing below), [D 1] is the first of three communication outputs and [D2] is the data destination register. Points to note: a)This instruction is 32-Bit. Be sure to input as DABS b)Read starts when the instruction drive contact turns ON. When the read is complete, the execution complete flag M8029 is energized. If the instruction drive contact is turned OFF during read, read is aborted. c)When designing a system, set the servo amplifier to be ON earlier than the power of the PLC, or so that they are both powered ON at the same time. d)The device [D2] to which the absolute value is read, can be set within a word device range. However, the absolute value should be transferred at some point to the correct registers (D8141 & D8140) e)The DABS instruction drive contact uses an input which is always ON, even after the absolute value is read. If the instruction drive contact turns OFF after the read is complete, the servo ON (SON) signal will turn OFF and the operation disabled. f)Even if the servo motor is equipped with an absolute position detection function, it is good practice to execute a zero return operation during initial system set up.
FX1S-30MT CN1 X000 X001 X002 COM 24V Y004 Y005 Y006
COM4

MR-H-A CN1 24 23 25 16 X000 X001 X002 COM D01 ZSP TLC SG ABS (bit 0) ABS (bit 1) Send Data Ready Flag PF ZSP TLC SG

MR-J2-A 4 19 6 10

Servo On SON 12 ABS Data Forwarding Mode D13 44 ABS Data Request D14 45

Y004 Y005 Y006

SON 12 ABSM 44 ABSR 45

5-164

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.13.7

ZRN (FNC 156)

Operands S1 S2 S3 X,Y, M,S

FX1S
Function

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic ZRN FNC 156 Zero return

D Y
Note: Y000 or Y001 only

Program steps ZRN: 9 steps DZRN: 17 steps

Return to zero home K,H,KnX,KnY, point after machine KnM,KnS ON or initial setting. T,C,D,V,Z

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

[S1]

[S2]

[S3] X003

[D] Y000

ZRN K1000 K100

Contents: When executing incremental or absolute positioning, the PLC stores the current position va l u e s w h i c h in c r e a s e o r d e c r e a s e d u r in g operation.

Using these values, the PLC always knows the machine position. However when the power to the PLC is turned off, this data is lost. To cope with this the machine should return to the zero point when the power is turned ON, or during initial set up, to teach the zero position. [S1] is the Zero Return Speed, [S2] is the Creep Speed, [S3] is the Near Point Signal, and [D] is the Pulse Output Designation. Points to note: a)Users may specify zero return speed [S1] as, 16-bit 10 to 32,767Hz or 32-bit 10 to 100kHz. b)Users may specify the creep speed [S2} of 10 to 32,767Hz c)If any device other than an input relay (X) is specified for the Near point signal [S3] it will be affected by the operation cycle of the PLC and the dispersion of the zero point may be large. d)Only Y000 or Y001 can be used for the pulse output [D]. Because of the nature of the high speed output, transistor type output units should be used with this instruction. Relay type outputs will suffer a greatly reduced life, and will cause false outputs to occur. To ensure a clean output signal when using transistor type units, the load current should be 200mA or higher with the FX2N Series. The load current should be 10 - 100mA with the FX1S/ 1N Series. It may be necessary to use pull up resistors. e)If M8140 is set to ON, the clear signal is sent to the servo motor when the return to zero point is complete. f)Related device numbers. D8141 (upper digit) & D8140 (lower digit) : Current value register of Y000 (32-bit) D8143 (upper digit) & D8142 (lower digit) : Current value register of Y001 (32-bit) D8147 (upper digit) & D8146 (lower digit) : Maximum speed when FNC156, FNC158 or FNC159 are executed 100~100,000Hz. D8148 : Acceleration/Deceleration time adopted when FNC156, FNC158 or FNC159 are executed.

5-165

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

M8145 : Y000 pulse output stop (immediate) M8146 : Y001 pulse output stop (immediate) M8147 : Y000 pulse output monitor (BUS/READY) M8148 : Y001 pulse output monitor (BUS/READY) g)When a Mitsubishi MR-H or MR-J2 servo amplifier equipped with absolute position detection function is used, the current position of the servo can be read by FNC 155 (ABS). Dog search function is not supported. Start zero return from the front side of the Near point signal. Attention should be paid to the instruction drive timing.

5-166

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.13.8

PLSV(FNC157)
Operands S K,H, KnX,KnY, KnM,KnS T,C,D,V,Z Y
Note: Y000 or Y001 only

FX1S
Function Variable speed pulse output

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic PLSV FNC 157 Pulse V

D2 Y,M,S

Program steps PLSV 9 steps DPLSV 17 steps

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Operation:
M0 PLSV [S] K1000 [D1] Y000 [D2] Y004

This is a variable speed output pulse instruction, with a rotation direction output. [S] is the Pulse Frequency, [D1] is the Pulse Output Designation, and [D 2 ] is the Rotation Direction Signal.

Points to note: a)Users may use output pulse frequencies [S1 ] of, 16-bit 10 to 32,767Hz or 32-bit 10 to 100kHz. b)Only Y000 or Y001 can be used for the pulse output [D1]. Because of the nature of the high speed output, transistor type output units should be used with this instruction. Relay type outputs will suffer a greatly reduced life, and will cause false outputs to occur. To ensure a clean output signal when using transistor type units, the load current should be 200mA or higher with the FX2N Series. The load current should be 10 - 100mA with the FX1S/ 1N Series. It may be necessary to use pull up resistors. c)Rotation direction signal output [D2} operated as follows: if [D2] = OFF, rotation = negative, if [D2] = ON, rotation = positive. d)The pulse frequency [S] can be changed even when pulses are being output. e)Acceleration/deceleration are not performed at start/stop. If cushion start/stop is required, increase or decrease the output pulse frequency [S] using the FNC67 RAMP instruction. f)If the instruction drive contact turns off while pulses are output, the machine stops without deceleration g)Once the instruction drive contact is off, re-drive of the instruction is not possible while the pulse output flag (Y000 : [M8147] Y001 : [M8148]) is ON. h)The normal or reverse direction is specified by the positive or negative sign of the output pulse frequency [S] i)Related device numbers. D8141 (upper digit) & D8140 (lower digit) : Current value register of Y000 (32-bit) D8143 (upper digit) & D8142 (lower digit) : Current value register of Y001 (32-bit) M8145 : Y000 pulse output stop (immediate) M8146 : Y001 pulse output stop (immediate) M8147 : Y000 pulse output monitor (BUS/READY) M8148 : Y001 pulse output monitor (BUS/READY) Attention should be paid to the instruction drive timing.

5-167

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.13.9

DRVI (FNC 158)

Operands S1 K,H, KnX,KnY, KnM,KnS T,C,D,V,Z S2 Y
Note: Y000 or Y001 only

FX1S
Function

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic DRVI FNC 158 Drive to increment

D2 Y,M,S

Program steps DRVI 9 steps DDRVI 17 steps

Increment positioning

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

[S1]

[S2]

[D1]

[D2] Y004

Operation: This instruction is for single speed positioning in the form of incremental movements.

DRVI K25000 K3000 Y000

[S 1 ] is the Number of Pulses, [S 2 ] is the Pulse Output Frequency, [D1] is the Pulse Output Designation, and [D2] is the Rotation Direction Signal. Points to note: a)The maximum number of pulses [S1] available are: 16-bit -32,768 to 32,767 pulses or 32-bit -999,999 to 999,999 pulses. b)Users may use output pulse frequencies [S2], 16-bit 10 to 32,767Hz or 32-bit 10 to 100kHz. c)Only Y000 or Y001 can be used for the pulse output [D1]. Because of the nature of the high speed output, transistor type output units should be used with this instruction. Relay type outputs will suffer a greatly reduced life, and will cause false outputs to occur. To ensure a clean output signal when using transistor type units, the load current should be 200mA or higher with the FX2N Series. The load current should be 10 - 100mA with the FX1S/ 1N Series. It may be necessary to use pull up resistors. d)Rotation direction signal output [D2] operated as follows: if [D2] = OFF, rotation = negative, if [D2] = ON, rotation = positive. e)If the contents of an operand are changed while the instruction is executed, it is not reflected on the operation. The new contents become effective when the instruction is next driven. f)If the instruction drive contact turns off while the instruction is being executed, the machine decelerates and stops. At this time the execution complete flag M8029 does not turn ON. g)Once the instruction drive contact is off, re-drive of the instruction is not possible while the pulse output flag (Y000 : [M8147], Y001 : [M8148]) is ON. h)For operation in the incremental drive method, the travel distance from the current position is specified with either a positive or a negative symbol. i)The minimum value of output pulse frequency which can be actually used is determined by the following equation
MaxSpeed [D8147,D8146] Hz ( 2 ( Acceleration\Deceleration [ D8148 ] ms 1000 ) )

5-168

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

f)Related device numbers. D8145 : Bias speed adopted when either FNC158, DRVI or FNC159, DRVA are executed D8147 (upper digit) & D8146 (lower digit) : Maximum speed when FNC156, FNC158 or FNC159 are executed 100~100,000Hz. D8148 : Acceleration/Deceleration time adopted when FNC156, FNC158 or FNC159 are executed. M8145 : Y000 pulse output stop (immediate) M8146 : Y001 pulse output stop (immediate) M8147 : Y000 pulse output monitor (BUS/READY) M8148 : Y001 pulse output monitor (BUS/READY) Attention should be paid to the instruction drive timing.

5-169

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.13.10 DRVA(FNC 159)

Operands S1 K,H, KnX,KnY, KnM,KnS T,C,D,V,Z S2 Y D1

FX1S
Function

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic DRVA FNC 159 Drive to absolute

D2 Y,M,S

Program steps DRVA 9 steps DDRVA 17 steps

Absolute positioning

Note: Y000 or Y001 only

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Operation:
M0 [S1] [S2] [D1] [D2] Y004 DRVA K25000 K3000 Y000

This instruction is for single speed positioning using a zero home point and absolute measurements.

[S 1 ] is the Number of Pulses, [S 2] is the Output Frequency, [D1] is the Pulse Output Designations, and [D2] is the Rotation Direction Signal. Points to note: a)The target position for absolute positioning [S1] can be: 16-bit -32,768 to 32,767 pulses or 32-bit -999,999 to 999,999 pulses. b)Users may use output pulse frequencies [S2], 16-bit 10 to 32,767Hz or 32-bit 10 to 100kHz. c)Only Y000 or Y001 can be used for the pulse output [D1]. Because of the nature of the high speed output, transistor type output units should be used with this instruction. Relay type outputs will suffer a greatly reduced life, and will cause false outputs to occur. To ensure a clean output signal when using transistor type units, the load current should be 200mA or higher with the FX2N Series. The load current should be 10 - 100mA with the FX1S/ 1N Series. It may be necessary to use pull up resistors. d)Rotation direction signal output [D2] operated as follows: if [D2] = OFF, rotation = negative, if [D2] = ON, rotation = positive. e)If the contents of an operand are changed while the instruction is executed, it is not reflected on the operation. The new contents become effective when the instruction is next driven. f)If the instruction drive contact turns off while the instruction is being executed, the machine decelerates and stops. At this time the execution complete flag M8029 does not turn ON. g)Once the instruction drive contact is off, re-drive of the instruction is not possible while the pulse output flag (Y000 : [M8147], Y001 : [M8148]) is ON. h)For operation in the absolute drive method, the travel distance from the zero point is specified. i)The minimum value of output pulse frequency which can be actually used is determined by the following equation
MaxSpeed [D8147,D8146] Hz ( 2 ( Acceleration\Deceleration [ D8148 ] ms 1000 ) )

5-170

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5-171

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

Memo

5-172

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

Applied Instructions:

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.

FNC 00 - 09

Program Flow Move And Compare

5-4 5-16

FNC 10 - 19

FNC 20 - 29

Arithmetic And Logical Operations (+, -, , )

5-24

FNC 30 - 39

5-34 5-42 5-52 5-66 5-80 5-94 5-110 5-118 5-122 5-126 5-136 5-146 5-146 5-150

FNC 40 - 49

FNC 50 - 59

FNC 60 - 69

FNC 70 - 79

FNC 80 - 89

FNC 110-129

FNC 130-139

FNC 140-149

FNC 150-159

" 14.
15. 16. 17.

FNC 160-169

FNC 170-179

FNC 180-189

FNC 220-249

5-173

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.14

Real Time Clock Control - FNC 160 to FNC 169

Contents: Page TCMP TZCP TADD TSUB 222 TRD TWR 222 HOUR Time Compare Time Zone Compare Time Add Time Subtract Not Available Read RTC data Set RTC data Not Available Hour meter FNC 160 FNC 161 FNC 162 FNC 163 FNC 164 to 165 FNC 166 FNC 167 FNC 168 FNC 169 5-143 5-141 5-142 5-137 5-138 5-139 5-140

Symbols list: D - Destination device. S - Source device. m, n- Number of active devices, bits or an operational constant. Additional numeric suffixes will be attached if there are more than one operand with the same function e.g. D1, S3 or for lists/tabled devices D3+0, S+9 etc. MSB - Most Significant Bit, sometimes used to indicate the mathematical sign of a number, i.e. positive = 0, and negative = 1. LSB - Least Significant Bit. Instruction modifications: 222 222P D222 An instruction operating in 16 bit mode, where 222 identifies the instruction mnemonic. A 16 bit mode instruction modified to use pulse (single) operation. An instruction modified to operate in 32 bit operation.

D222P - A 32 bit mode instruction modified to use pulse (single) operation.

( - A repetitive instruction which will change the destination value on every scan unless
modified by the pulse function.

) - An operand which cannot be indexed, i.e. The addition of V or Z is either invalid or will
have no effect to the value of the operand.

5-174

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.14.1

TCMP (FNC 160)

Operands S1 S2 S3

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic TCMP FNC 160 (Time Compare)

Function Compares two times - results of <, = and > are given

S T, C, D

D Y, M, S

Program steps TCMP, TCMPP: 11 steps

K, H, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z

Note: 3 consecutive devices are used.

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Contents:
X10 [ S1 ] [ S2 ] [ S3 ] TCMP K10 K30 K50 M0 M1 M2 [S] D0 [D] D0

ON when D0,D1,D2 < 10:30:50 ON when D0,D1,D2 = 10:30:50 ON when D0,D1,D2 > 10:30:50

S 1 , S 2 and S 3 represent hours, minutes and seconds respectively. This time is compared to the time value in the 3 data devices specified by the head address S. The result is indicated in the 3 bit devices specified by the head address D.

The bit devices in D indicate the following: D+0 is set ON, when the time in S is less than the time in S1, S2 and S3. D+1 is set ON, when the time in S is equal to the time in S1, S2 and S3. D+2 is set ON, when the time in S is greater than the time in S1, S2 and S3. Points to note: a) The status of the destination devices is kept, even if the TCMP instruction is deactivated. b) The comparison is based on the time value specified in the source devices. - The valid range of values for S1 and S+0 is 0 to 23 (Hours). - The valid range of values for S2 and S+1 is 0 to 59 (Minutes). - The valid range of values for S3 and S+2 is 0 to 59 (Seconds). c) The current time of the real time clock can be compared by specifying D8015 (Hours), D8014 (Minutes) and D8013 (Seconds) as the devices for S1, S2 and S3 respectively.

5-175

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.14.2

TZCP (FNC 161)

Operands S1 S2 S

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic TZCP FNC 161 (Time Zone Compare)

Function

Program steps TZCP, TZCPP: 9 steps

Compares a time T, C, D Y, M, S to a specified time S1 must be less than or equal to S2. range - results of Note: 3 consecutive devices are used for all <, = and > are given

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

X10

[ S1 ] [ S2 ] TZCP D20 M0 M1 M2 D30

[S] D0

[D] M15

Contents: S 1 , S 2 a n d S r e p r e s e n t t i m e v a lu e s . E a c h specifying the head address of 3 data devices. S is compared to the time period defined by S1 and S2. The result is indicated in the 3 bit devices specified by the head address D.

ON when D0,D1,D2 < D20,D21,D22 ON when D20,D21,D22 D0,D1,D2 D30,D31,D32 ON when D30,D31,D32 < D0,D1,D2

The bit devices in D indicate the following: D+0 is set ON, when the time in S is less than the times in S1 and S2. D+1 is set ON, when the time in S is between the times in S1 and S2. D+2 is set ON, when the time in S is greater than the times in S1 and S2. Points to note: a) The status of the destination devices is kept, even if the TCMP instruction is deactivated. b) The comparison is based on the time value specified in the source devices. - The valid range of values for S1 and S+0 is 0 to 23 (Hours). - The valid range of values for S2 and S+1 is 0 to 59 (Minutes). - The valid range of values for S3 and S+2 is 0 to 59 (Seconds).

5-176

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.14.3

TADD (FNC 162)

Operands S1 S2

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic TADD FNC 162 (Time Addition)

Function

Program steps

TADD, Adds two time T, C, D TADDP: values together to give a new time Note: 3 consecutive devices are used to represent 7 steps hours, minutes and seconds respectively.
Zero M8020 Carry M8022

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Flags

Contents:
X13 [ S1 ] [ S2 ] [ D ] TSUB D10 D20 D30

Each of S1, S2 and D specify the head address of 3 data devices to be used a time value. The time value in S1 is added to the time value in S2, the result is stored to D as a new time value.

Points to note: a) The addition is performed according to standard time values. Hours, minutes and seconds are kept within correct limits. Any overflow is correctly processed.
S1 D10: 10 hours D11: 30 mins D12: 27 secs 10:30:29 + S2 D20: 30 hours D21: 10 mins D22: 49 secs 03:10:49 = D D30: 13 hours D31: 41 mins D32: 16 secs 13:41:16

b) If the addition of the two times results in a value greater than 24 hours, the value of the result is the time remaining above 24 hours.
S1 D10: 10 hours D11: 17 mins D12: 29 secs 10:17:29 + S2 D20: 18 hours D21: 12 mins D22: 34 secs 18:12:34 = D D30: 13 hours D31: 41 mins D32: 16 secs 04:30:03 M8022 ON

When this happens the carry flag M8022 is set ON. c) If the addition of the two times results in a value of zero (0:00:00: 0 hours, 0 minutes, 0 seconds) then the zero flag M8020 is set ON. d) The same device may be used as a source (S1 or S2) and destination device. In this case the addition is continually executed; the destination value changing each program scan. To prevent this from happening, use the pulse modifier or an interlock program.

5-177

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.14.4

TSUB (FNC 163)

Operands S1 T, C, D S2

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic TSUB FNC 163 (Time Subtraction)

Function Subtracts one time value from another to give a new time

Program steps TSUB, TSUBP: 7 steps

Note: 3 consecutive devices are used.

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Flags

Zero M8020 Borrow M8021

Contents:
X13 [ S1 ] [ S2 ] [ D ] TSUB D10 D20 D30

Each of S1, S2 and D specify the head address of 3 data devices to be used a time value. The time value in S 1 is subtracted from the time value in S2, the result is stored to D as a new time value.

Points to note: a) The subtraction is performed according to standard time values. Hours, minutes and seconds are kept within correct limits. Any underflow is correctly processed.
S1 D10: 10 hours D11: 30 mins D12: 27 secs 10:30:27 S2 D20: 3 hours D21: 10 mins D22: 49 secs 03:10:49 = D D30: 7 hours D31: 19 mins D32: 38 secs 07:19:38

b) If the subtraction of the two times results in a value less than 00:00:00 hours, the value of the result is the time remaining below 00:00:00 hours.
S1 D10: 10 hours D11: 17 mins D12: 29 secs 10:17:29 S2 D20: 18 hours D21: 12 mins D22: 34 secs 18:12:34 = D D30: 13 hours D31: 41 mins D32: 16 secs 16:04:55 M8021 ON

When this happens the borrow flag M8021 is set ON. c) If the subtraction of the two times results in a value of zero (00:00:00 hours) then the zero flag M8020 is set ON. d) The same device may be used as a source (S1 or S2) and destination device. In this case the subtraction is continually executed; the destination value changing each program scan. To prevent this from happening, use the pulse modifier or an interlock program.

5-178

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.14.5

TRD (FNC 166)

Operands D

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic TRD FNC 166 (Time Read)

Function

Program steps TRD, TRDP: 5 steps

Reads the current T, C, D value of the real Note: 7 consecutive devices are used. time clock to a group of registers

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Contents:

M34

[D] TRD D12

The current time and date of the real time clock are read and stored in the 7 data devices specified by the head address D.

The 7 devices are set as follows:

Device D8018 D8017 D8016 D8015 D8014 D8013 D8019 Meaning Year Month Date Hours Minutes Seconds Day Values 00-99 01-12 01-31 00-23 00-59 00-59 0-6 (Sun-Sat) Device D+0 D+1 D+2 D+3 D+4 D+5 D+6 Meaning Year Month Date Hours Minutes Seconds Day

Points to note: The year is read as a two digit number. This can be change to a 4 digit number by setting D8018 to 2000 during the first program scan; see following program extract.

M8002

MOV K2000 D8018

If this is done then the clock year should not be used during the first scan as it will be a two digit number before the instruction and a value of 2000 after the instruction until the END instruction executes. After the first scan the year is read and written as a 4 digit number.

5-179

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.14.6

TWR (FNC 167)

Operands S T, C, D

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic TWR FNC 167 (Time Write)

Function Sets the real time clock to the value stored in a group of registers

Program steps TWR, TWRP: 5 steps

Note: 7 consecutive devices are used.

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

M34

[S] TWR D20

Contents: The 7 data devices specified with the head address S are used to set a new current value of the real time clock.

The seven devices

Device S+0 S+1 S+2 S+3 S+4 S+5 S+6 Meaning Year Month Date Hours Minutes Seconds Day Values 00-99 01-12 01-31 00-23 00-59 00-59 0-6 (Sun-Sat) Device D8018 D8017 D8016 D8015 D8014 D8013 D8019 Meaning Year Month Date Hours Minutes Seconds Day

Points to note: This instruction removes the need to use M8015 during real time clock setting. When setting the time it is a good idea to set the source data to a time a number of minutes ahead and then drive the instruction when the real time reaches this value.

5-180

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.14.7

Hour (FNC 169)

Operands S D1

FX1S
Function Hour meter

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic Hour FNC 169 Hour meter

Program steps

K,H, D Z,Y, KnX, KnY, Note: Data M,S KnM, KnS, register should battery T,C,D,V,Z be backed

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Operation 1: 16 bit instruction [S] = Period of time before [D2] turns on (Hrs) [D1] = Current value in Hours [D1]+1 = Current value, if less than 1 hour, time is specified in seconds. [D2] = Alarm output destination, turns on when [D1] exceeds [S] In the above example, [D2] turns on at 300 hours and 1 second.
DHOUR K300 D200 Y005 X000 [S] [D1] [D2]

Operation 2: 32 bit instruction [S] = Period of time in which [D2] turns on (Hrs) [D1] = Current value in Hours [D 1 ]+2 = Current value, if less than 1 hour. In seconds [D2] = Alarm output destination, when [D1] exceeds [S] In the above example, [D2] turns on at 4000 hours and 1 second.
DHOUR K4000 D210 Y007 X000 [S] [D1] [D2]

Points to note: a)In order to continuously use the current value data, even after a power OFF and ON, specify a data register which is backed up against power interruption. b)The hour meter will continue operation even after the alarm output [D2] turns ON. Operation will stop when the value of [D1] reaches the maximum for the specified 16 or 32 bit operation. If continuous operation id required, clear the value stored in [D1] to [D1]+1 (16-bit) and [D1] to [D1]+2 (32-bit).

5-181

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

Memo

5-182

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

Applied Instructions:

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

FNC 00 - 09

Program Flow Move And Compare

5-4 5-16

FNC 10 - 19

FNC 20 - 29

Arithmetic And Logical Operations (+, -, , )

5-24

FNC 30 - 39

5-34 5-42 5-52 5-66 5-80 5-94 5-110 5-118 5-122 5-126 5-136 5-146 5-146 5-150

FNC 40 - 49

FNC 50 - 59

FNC 60 - 69

FNC 70 - 79

FNC 80 - 89

FNC 110-129

FNC 130-139

FNC 140-149

FNC 150-159

FNC 160-169

15. 16. 17.

FNC 170-179

FNC 180-189

FNC 220-249

5-183

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.15

Gray Codes - FNC 170 to FNC 179

Contents: Page GRY GBIN 222 RD3A WR3A Decimal to Gray Code Gray Code to Decimal FNC 170 FNC 171 FNC 172 to 175 FNC 176 FNC 177 5-148 5-148 5-147 5-147

Not Available
Read FX0N-3A Write to FX0N-3A

Symbols list: D - Destination device. S - Source device. m, n- Number of active devices, bits or an operational constant. Additional numeric suffixes will be attached if there are more than one operand with the same function e.g. D1, S3 or for lists/tabled devices D3+0, S+9 etc. MSB - Most Significant Bit, sometimes used to indicate the mathematical sign of a number, i.e. positive = 0, and negative = 1. LSB - Least Significant Bit. Instruction modifications: 222 222P D222 An instruction operating in 16 bit mode, where 222 identifies the instruction mnemonic. A 16 bit mode instruction modified to use pulse (single) operation. An instruction modified to operate in 32 bit operation.

D222P - A 32 bit mode instruction modified to use pulse (single) operation.

( - A repetitive instruction which will change the destination value on every scan unless
modified by the pulse function.

) - An operand which cannot be indexed, i.e. The addition of V or Z is either invalid or will
have no effect to the value of the operand.

5-184

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.15.1

GRY (FNC 170)

Operands S K, H, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic GRY FNC 170 (Gray Code)

Function Calculates the gray code value of an integer

D KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z

Program steps GRY,GRYP: 5 steps DGRY,DGRYP 9 steps

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Operation:
M45 [S] [D] GRY K1234 K3Y10

The binary integer value in S is converted to the GRAY CODE equivalent and stored at D.

Points to Note: The nature of gray code numbers allows numeric values to be quickly output without the need for a strobing signal. For example, if the source data is continually incremented, the new output data can be set each program scan.

5-185

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.15.2

GBIN (FNC 171)

Operands S K, H, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic GBIN FNC 171 (Gray Code)

Function Calculates the integer value of a gray code

D KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z

Program steps GBIN,GBINP: 5 steps DGBIN, DGBINP: 9 steps

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

T24

[S] [D] GBIN K3X20 D10

Operation: The GRAY CODE value in S is converted to the normal binary equivalent and stored at D.

Points to Note: This instruction can be used to read the value from a gray code encoder. If the source is set to inputs X0 to X17 it is possible to speed up the reading time by adjusting the refresh filter with FNC 51 REFF.

5-186

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.15.3

RD3A (FNC 176)

Operands M1 M2

FX1S
Function

FX1N

FX2N FX2NC
Program steps

Mnemonic RD3A FNC 176 Read analog block

D KnY, KnM,KnS T.C,D,V,Z

Analog block read for FX0N-3A, FX2N-2AD

K,H. KnX, KnY,KnM,KnS, T,C,D,V,Z

RD3A 7 steps

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Operation:
X000 RD3A [M1] K0 [M2] K1 [D] D0

This instruction reads the analog input value of the FX0N-3A or FX2N-2AD block. [M1] = Special block number, K0 to K7 [M2] = Analog input channel number, K1/K21 or K2/K22 [D] = Read data Points to note:

Adjustment of the FX0N-3A or FX2N-2AD analog block characteristics should be completed in advance of using this instruction. For guidance please see the relevant manual. For the FX0N-3A, K1 = Channel 1, K2 = Channel 2. For the FX2N-2AD, K21 = Channel 1, K22 = Channel 2 FX1N series can only communicate with the FX0N-3A D = 0~255(8 bit) D = 0~4095(12bit)

5-187

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.15.4

WR3A (FNC 177)

Operands M1 M2

FX1S
Function

FX1N

FX2N FX2NC
Program steps

Mnemonic WR3A FNC 177 Write to Analog block

S KnY, KnM,KnS T.C,D,V,Z

Write data to analog block FX0N-3A, FX2N2AD, FX2N-2DA

K,H. KnX, KnY,KnM,KnS, T,C,D,V,Z

WR3A 7 steps

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Operation:
X000 WR3A [M1] K0 [M2] K1 [S] D2

This instruction writes data to the FX0N-3A or FX2N-2DA analog block. [M1] = Special block number, K0 to K7 [M2] = Analog output channel number, K1/K21 or K22 [S] = Write data

Points to note: Adjustment of the FX0N-3A or FX2N-2DA analog block characteristics should be completed in advance of using this instruction. For guidance please see the relevant manual. For the FX0N-3A, K1 = Channel 1 (only 1 output channel available) S = 0~255(8 bit) For the FX2N-2DA, K21 = Channel 1, K22 = Channel 2 S = 0~4095(12bit) FX1N series can only communicate with the FX0N-3A

5-188

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

Applied Instructions:

FX1S

FX1N FX2N FX2NC

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

FNC 00 - 09

Program Flow Move And Compare

5-4 5-16

FNC 10 - 19

FNC 20 - 29

Arithmetic And Logical Operations (+, -, , )

5-24

FNC 30 - 39

5-34 5-42 5-52 5-66 5-80 5-94 5-110 5-118 5-122 5-126 5-136 5-146 5-146 5-150

FNC 40 - 49

FNC 50 - 59

FNC 60 - 69

FNC 70 - 79

FNC 80 - 89

FNC 110-129

FNC 130-139

FNC 140-149

FNC 150-159

FNC 160-169

FNC 170-179

16. 17.

FNC 180-189

FNC 220-249

5-189

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.16

Additional Functions - FNC 180 to FNC 189

Contents: Page EXTR External ROM Function FNC 180 5-190

Symbols list: D - Destination device. S - Source device. m, n- Number of active devices, bits or an operational constant. Additional numeric suffixes will be attached if there are more than one operand with the same function e.g. D1, S3 or for lists/tabled devices D3+0, S+9 etc. MSB - Most Significant Bit, sometimes used to indicate the mathematical sign of a number, i.e. positive = 0, and negative = 1. LSB - Least Significant Bit. Instruction modifications: 222 222P D222 D222 An instruction operating in 16 bit mode, where 222 identifies the instruction mnemonic. A 16 bit mode instruction modified to use pulse (single) operation. An instruction modified to operate in 32 bit operation. A 32 bit mode instruction modified to use pulse (single) operation.

( - A repetitive instruction which will change the destination value on every scan unless
modified by the pulse function.

) - An operand which cannot be indexed, i.e. The addition of V or Z is either invalid or will
have no effect to the value of the operand.

5-190

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.16.1

EXTR (FNC 180)

Operands S K, H,

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic EXTR FNC 180 (External ROM)

Function External ROM instruction, execution commands

SD1 SD2 SD3 K, H, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z, X, Y, M, S.

Program steps EXTR 9 steps DEXTR, DEXTRP 17 steps

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

Operation: S
EXTR K0

SD1 SD2 SD3

D100 D200 M10

The value of S stored in the extension ROM (K0 to K32767) defines the function number and the instruction. SD 1, SD2 and SD3 are parameters of the application instruction. S or D varies depending on the function number. The type of operation (16 bit, 32 bit, pulse) is determined from the instruction number.

Points to Note: In some function numbers, the parameters SD 1 to SD 3 may not be required due to specifications. In such a case K0 should be written in the program. K0 is ignored in the internal processing of the PLC. As each of the external ROM cassettes (FX2N-ROM-E1 and FX2NC-ROM-CE1) attach to the memory port of an FX2N or FX2NC series PLC, both are equipped with a 16K step EEPROM. In addition, the FX2NC-ROM-CE1 also contains a real-time clock. Accordingly, the FX2N-ROM-E1 and FX2NC-ROM-CE1 are compatible as advanced units of the FX-EEPROM-16 and FX2NC-EEPROM16C respectively. The FX2N-ROM-E1 and FX2NC-ROM-CE1 are only operable with FX2N and FX 2NC units of V3.00 or later

5.16.1.1 Inverter Communication External ROM cassette functions 10 to 13 are for reading and writing data to/from an inverter using signal instructions. These functions are available when an FX 2N -485-BD or FX 0N 485ADP is attached to the PLC, for communication with a Mitsubishi Electric A500/E500/S500 series inverter.
Function No. EXTR K10 EXTR K11 EXTR K12 EXTR K13 Function Operation monitoring Operation Control Parameter read Parameter write Data Direction INV to PLC PLC to INV INV to PLC PLC to INV Reference to Inverter manual Execute operation control as for computer link, and refer to monitoring for communication functions. Refer to the parameter code list in the relevant manuals appendix.

5-191

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.16.1.1.1 Restrictions Six digit commands that are supported in the E500 and S500 series inverters are not supported by the EXTR function. 5.16.1.1.2 Settings in the PLC EXTR K10 to K13 use the FX 2N -485-BD or FX 0N -485ADP in the same way as the RS instruction (FNC 80). The communication conditions should be set in the Serial setting parameter in FX-PCS/WIN-E or GX Developer. When setting the Serial Parameters from the software packages FX-PCS/WIN-E or GX Developer, do not use data registers D8120, D8121, and D8129 in the user program. These registers are set by the software package and if changed in the user program will cause communication problems between the PLC and the Inverter. For FX-PCS/WIN-E: 1) Select Option - Serial setting (Parameter) 2) Click Yes 3) Set Serial setting (Parameters) as shown below a) Set these parameters as show on the left. DO NOT select Link

a b

b) Select either 19200, 9600 or 4800. This value should be the same as set in the parameter of the inverter. c) These parameters do not affect communication with the inverter.

5-192

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

For GX Developer 1) Select Parameters 2) Select PLC Parameter 3) Select PLC System (2) and set as shown below. a) Set these parameters as show on the left. DO NOT select Link b) Select either 19200, 9600 or 4800. This value should be th e s am e as s et in th e inverter.

a c

c) These parameters do not affect communication with the inverter.

b c

5-193

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.16.1.1.3 Inverter settings and PLC communication settings Inverter communication specification and application to PLC
Inverter specifications Transmission standard Number of connected units Communication speed Control procedure Communication method Character type Communication specifications Stop bit length Terminator Check method RS-485 1:N (8 units maximum) 19200, 9600 or 4800 bps (selectable) Asynchronous system Half duplex ASCII (7 or 8 bits) (selectable) 1 or 2 bits (selectable) Application to PLC RS-485 1:N (8 units maximum) 19200, 9600 or 4800 bps (selectable) Asynchronous system Half duplex Fixed to 7 bits Fixed to 1 bit

CR/LF (absence/presence selectFixed to CR only able)

Parity check/
Sum check

Fixed (even), fixed (odd) or not fixed (selectable) Fixed Set by customer

Fixed to even parity Fixed Set by communication data

Waiting time setting

Note: Some of the specifications above are fixed in the PLC but variable in the inverter. This has been done to ease set up and reduce any possible problems during configuration. For more information on the inverter, please see the appropriate inverter manual.

5-194

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

A500 series settings

Parameter number Description Set value Contents
Corresponds to the station No. specified from the PU connector. If two or more inverters, set the station No. at each inverter 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 8 data bits / 1 stop bit 8 data bits / 2 stop bits 7 data bits / 1 stop bit 7 data bits / 2 stop bits Absent Present (Odd) Present (Even) Set number of retries after data receive error. If this value is exceeded, inverter comes to alarm stop If a comms error occours, inverter will not come to alarm stop. At this time inverter can be coasted to stop by MRS or RES input. During comms. error, the LF signal is output to the open collector output. Allocate one terminal from Pr.190-195 Comms not executed While default value 0 is selected, communications are disabled. Select 9999, perform adjustment, then select optimal value During trial run select 9999 and perform adjustment. During actual operation select value in accordance with system specifications Select 2 Select 10

Setting for comms to PLC

117

Station No.

0~31

Align setting with station number in the sequence program

48 118 Communication speed 96 192 0 119 Stop bit length / Data bit length 1 10 11 0 120 Parity check 1 2 0,1~10

Normally select 192. If high speed processing in PLC use 96 or 48

121

Number of communication retries

9999 (65535)

0 Communication check time interval

122*

Set comms check time interval. If a no-communication state 0.1~999.8 persists for longer than the set time, inverter comes to alarm stop. See Note on page 195.

9999 123 Waiting time setting 0~150 9999 0 124 CR,LF selection 1 2 342 E2PROM write selection 0 1

Comms check suspended Set waiting time between data transmission and response Waiting time set by communication data CR & LF instructions absent CR instruction present CR & LF instructions present Parameter write from computer to EEPROM Select either value according to Parameter write from computer system specifications to RAM Select 1

Select 9999

5-195

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

*A500 + A5NR settings

Parameter number 331 Name Inverter station No. Comms speed Stop bit length Parity check yes/no Comms retry count Comms check time interval Setting range Setting increment 1 Inverter station No. 0 Setting for comms to PLC Align setting with station number in the sequence program Normally select 192. If high speed processing in PLC use 96 or 48 Select 10 Select 2 During trial run select 9999 and perform adjustment. During actual operation select value in accordance with system specifications While default value 0 is selected, communications are disabled. Select 9999, perform adjustment, then select optimal value. See Note below. Select either value in accordance to system specifications Select either value in accordance to system specifications Select either value in accordance to system specifications Select 1 CR only Select either value in accordance to system specifications

0~31 3,6,12,24,48,9 6,192 0,1 (8 bit) 10,11 (7bit) 0,1,2 0~10, 9999 0~999.8, 9999

332 333 334 335 336

1 1 1 1 0.1

96 1 2 1 0

337*

Wait time setting

0~150ms, 9999

1ms

9999

338

Operation command write Speed command write Link start mode selection CR/LF yes/no selection EEPROM write selection

0,1

339

0,1

340 341

0,1,2 0,1,2 0: write to EEPROM 1: write to RAM

1 1

0 1

342

*Note: The time settings should be set as low as possible to avoid problems during a communication failure. The inverter will continue to run during the set time which may cause equipment damage or raise a safety issue. Please turn the inverter Off when communication problems are encountered.

5-196

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

E500 series settings

Parameter number Description Set value Contents
Corresponds to the station No. specified from the PU connector. If two or more inverters, set the station No. at each inverter 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 8 data bits / 1 stop bit 8 data bits / 2 stop bits 7 data bits / 1 stop bit 7 data bits / 2 stop bits Absent Present (Odd) Present (Even) Set number of retries after data receive error. If this value is exceeded, inverter comes to alarm stop If a comms error occours, inverter will not come to alarm stop. At this time inverter can be coasted to stop by MRS or RES input. During comms. error, the LF signal is output to the open collector output. Allocate one terminal from Pr.190-192 Comms not executed While default value 0 is selected, communications are disabled. Select 9999, perform adjustment, then select optimal value During trial run select 9999 and perform adjustment. During actual operation select value in accordance with system specifications Select 2 Select 10

Setting for comms to PLC

117

Station No.

0~31

Align setting with station number in the sequence program

48 118 Communication speed 96 192 0 119 Stop bit length / Data bit length 1 10 11 0 120 Parity check 1 2 0,1~10

Normally select 192. If high speed processing in PLC use 96 or 48

121

Number of communication retries

9999 (65535)

0 Communication check time interval

122*

Set comms check time interval. If a no-communication state 0.1~999.8 persists for longer than the set time, inverter comes to alarm stop. See Note on page 195.

9999 123 Waiting time setting 0~150 9999 0 124 CR,LF selection 1 2

Select 9999

5-197

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

S500 series settings

Parameter number Description Set value Contents
Corresponds to the station No. specified from the PU connector. If two or more inverters, set the station No. at each inverter 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 8 data bits / 1 stop bit 8 data bits / 2 stop bits 7 data bits / 1 stop bit 7 data bits / 2 stop bits Absent Present (Odd) Present (Even) Set number of retries after data receive error. If this value is exceeded, inverter comes to alarm stop If a comms error occours, inverter will not come to alarm stop. At this time inverter can be coasted to stop by MRS or RES input. During comms. error, the LF signal is output to the open collector output. Allocate one terminal from Pr.64-65 Comms not executed While default value 0 is selected, communications are disabled. Select 9999, perform adjustment, then select optimal value During trial run select 9999 and perform adjustment. During actual operation select value in accordance with system specifications Select 2 Select 10

Setting for comms to PLC

Station No.

0~31

Align setting with station number in the sequence program

48 n2 Communication speed 96 192 0 n3 Stop bit length / Data bit length 1 10 11 0 n4 Parity check 1 2 0,1~10

Normally select 192. If high speed processing in PLC use 96 or 48

Number of communication retries

9999 (65535)

0 Communication check time interval

n6*

Set comms check time interval. If a no-communication state 0.1~999.8 persists for longer than the set time, inverter comes to alarm stop. See Note on Page 195.

9999 n7 Waiting time setting 0~150 9999 0 n11 CR,LF selection 1 2

Select 9999

5-198

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

Example of transmission format when data is written from PLC to inverter

ENQ H05

Inverter station 6 H30 H36

Command H80 H38 H30

Wait time =0 H30 H31

Data = 1234 H32 H33 H34

SUM H43 H38

CR H0D

H30+H36+H38+H30+H30+H31+H32+H33+H34=H1C8 C=H43 8=H38 5.16.1.1.4 EXTR K10 - Monitoring operations (Inverter to PLC)

S1
EXTR K10

S2
K6

S3
H6F

S4
D100

16 Bit Operation 32 Bit Operation Pulse - P

Parameter S1 S2 S3 S4 K/H KH, D KH, D

Device type

Parameter range K10: function No. to monitor inverter operations Inverter station number (0 to 31) Inverter instructuion code (varies with model) Read value storage destination

D, KnY, KnM, KnS

Details of S3
Instruction Code H7B H6F H70 H71 H72 H73 H74 H75 H76 H77 H7A H6E H6D H00~H7B H7F H6C Monitor contents Operation mode Output frequency Output current Output voltage Special monitor Special monitor selection No. Alarm definition Alarm definition Alarm definition Alarm definition Inverter status monitor Set frequency read (EEPROM) Set frequency read (RAM) Parameter read Link parameter Second parameter change A500 E500 S500 Data digits 4 4 4 4 4 2 Comms format BE |F BE |F BE |F BE |F BE |F BE |F BE |F BE |F BE |F BE |F BE |F BE |F BE |F BE |F BE |F BE |F

4 4 4 4

2 4 4 4 2 2

Note: The shaded area is supported but is executed by EXTR K12.

5-199

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.16.1.1.5 EXTR K11 - Control operations (PLC to Inverter)

S1
EXTR K11

S2
K4

S3
HFA

S4
K02

16 Bit Operation 32 Bit Operation Pulse - P

Parameter S1 S2 S3 S4 K/H KH, D KH, D

Device type

Parameter range K11: function No. to control inverter operations Inverter station number (0 to 31) Inverter instructuion code (varies with model) Value to be written to inverter

KH D, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS

Details of S3
S3 HFB HF3 HFA HEE HED HFD HF4 HFC H80~HFD HFC HFF HEC Control contents Operation mode Special monitor selection No. Operation command Set frequency read (EEPROM) Set frequency read (RAM) Inverter reset Alarm definition batch clear All parameter clear Parameter write User clear Link parameter extension setting Second parameter changing (code FF=1) A500 E500 S500 Data digits 4 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 2 Comms format AC |D AC |D AC |D AC |D AC |D A (no response) AC |D AC |D AC |D AC |D AC |D AC |D

Note: The shaded areas are re-written in the internal processing when EXTR K13 is executed.

5-200

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.16.1.1.6 Relationship between EXTR K10/K11 and A500/E500/S500 series The page below is taken from section 4.2.41, paragraph 5 Instructions for the program <setting items and set data> in the FR A500 series instruction manual, IB(NA)-66790-G The following example reads the Output Frequency from Inverter station #1 and stores this value to D100.

EXTR

K10

H6F

D100

Number of digits, 2 or 4, is automatically determined by the PLC, based on the instruction code.

5-201

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

The following example writes the Run Command parameters to Inverter Station #1.
EXTR K11 K1 HFA K2M64

For 2 seconds after the reset instruction is transmitted, the inverter does not accept communication. As this period of time is controlled by the PLC, the sequence does not need to be taken into consideration

Use EXTR K12/K13 to read and write parameters Before parameter read/ write, link parameters are automatically re-written If a second parameter is present, it is automatically re-written

EXTR

K11

HFC

K9696

Note: As parameters 9,10 11 and 12 are used for EXTR K12/13, DO NOT use them with EXTR K11/ K12.

5-202

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.16.1.1.7 EXTR K12 - Parameter read (Inverter to PLC)

S1
EXTR K12

S2
K2

S3
K3

S4
D100

16 Bit Operation 32 Bit Operation Pulse - P

Parameter S1 S2 S3 S4 K/H KH, D KH, D

Device type

Parameter range K12: function No. to read inverter parameters Inverter station number (0 to 31) Inverter instructuion code (varies with model) Value of storage destination

D, KnY, KnM, KnS

Link parameters are automatically re-written in accordance with the parameter No. 5.16.1.1.8 EXTR K13 - Parameter write (PLC to Inverter)

S1
EXTR K13

S2
K2

S3
K3

S4
K5600

16 Bit Operation

32 Bit Operation Pulse - P

Parameter S1 S2 S3 S4 K/H KH, D KH, D

Device type

Parameter range K13: function No. to write inverter parameters Inverter station number (0 to 31) Inverter instructuion code (varies with model) Value to be written to inverter

KH, D, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS

Link parameters are automatically re-written in accordance with the parameter No.

5-203

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.16.1.1.9 Relationship between EXTR K12/K13 and A500/E500/S500 series The following page is from the Data COD list of the FR A500 series instruction manual, IB(NA)66790-G.
EXTR K12 K(Station No.) K(Parameter No.) D****

The following example displays how to read the parameter from the inverter. The following example displays how to write the parameter to the inverter. The following example reads the Base Frequency from the 2nd inverter station and stores this value to D100. The following example writes K5600 to the Base Frequency in the 2nd inverter station. The data is calculated by the PLC in accordance with the parameter.

EXTR

K13

K(station No.) K(Parameter No.)

K****

EXTR

K12

D100

EXTR

K13

K5600

5-204

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

No. Reading and Writing to parameters which require a second parameter

No. Item Read Second parameter changing (code FF=1) Instruction code H6C Description
When setting the programmed operation (data code H3D to H5A, HBD to HDA) parameter H000: time H001: time H002: rotation direction When setting the bias/gain (data code H5E to H6A, HDE to HED) parameter H000: Offset/Gain H001: Analog H002: Analog value of terminal

Number of data digits

Write

HEC

2 digits

For parameters that require the setting of a second parameter. If a value of +0, +1000 or +2000 is set to a parameter No. in the inverter manual, the second parameter will be automatically re-written before a general parameter read/write.

Classification H00: Operation frequency a) H01: Time H02: Rotation direction H00: Offset / Gain b) H01: Analog H02: Analog value of terminal

Offset for parameter number +0 +1000 +2000 +0 +1000 +2000

5-205

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

Setting the third parameter of EXTR K12/K13 during programmed operation in the A500 Parameter No.
201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230

Name
Program set 1 Program set 1 Program set 1 Program set 1 Program set 1 Program set 1 Program set 1 Program set 1 Program set 1 Program set 1 Program set 2 Program set 2 Program set 2 Program set 2 Program set 2 Program set 2 Program set 2 Program set 2 Program set 2 Program set 2 Program set 3 Program set 3 Program set 3 Program set 3 Program set 3 Program set 3 Program set 3 Program set 3 Program set 3 Program set 3

Operation frequency read/write

201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230

Time read/write
1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 1210 1211 1212 1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230

Rotation direction read/write

2201 2202 2203 2204 2205 2206 2207 2208 2209 2210 2211 2212 2213 2214 2215 2216 2217 2218 2219 2220 2221 2222 2223 2224 2225 2226 2227 2228 2229 2230

Frequency read Frequency write

EXTR EXTR

K12 K12

K(station No.) K(station No.)

K230 K230

D(register No.) K(frequency)

Parameter No.

Time read Time write

EXTR EXTR

K12 K12

K(station No.) K(station No.)

K1230 K1230

D(register No.) H(time)

Parameter No. +1000

Rotation direction read Rotation direction write

EXTR EXTR

K12 K12

K(station No.) K(station No.)

K2230 K2230

D(register No.) K(direction)

Parameter No. +2000

5-206

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

Reading and writing the bias/gain in the A500/E500/S500 Parameter No.

902 903 904 905

Name Frequency setting voltage bias Frequency setting voltage gain Frequency setting current bias Frequency setting current gain

Offset/gain read/write
902 903 904 905

Analog read/write
1902 1903 1904 1905

Terminal analog value read

2902 2903 2904 2905

Offset/Gain read Offset/Gain write

EXTR EXTR

K12 K12

K(station No.) K(station No.)

K902 K902

D(register No.) K(frequency)

Parameter No.

Analog read Analog write

EXTR EXTR

K12 K12

K(station No.) K(station No.)

K1902 K1902

D(register No.) K(percentage)

Parameter No.+1000

Terminal analog value read

EXTR

K12

K(station No.)

K2902

D100

Parameter No.+2000

The following parameters CANNOT be used with EXTR K12/K13

Parameter No. Function Data code Name Read 6C 6D 6E 6F 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 7A 7B 7F Write EC ED EE F3 F4 FA FB FC FD FF Link parameter extension set value (data code 7F/FF) -

Second parameter changing Frequency Operation frequency (RAM) setting Operation frequency (E2PROM) Frequency monitoring Output current monitoring Monitoring Output voltage monitoring Special monitoring Special monitoring selection No. Most recent No.1, No.2 / alarm display clear Alarm display Most recent No.3, No.4 Most recent No.5, No.6 Most recent No.7, No.8 Inverter status monitoring / run command Operation mode aquisition Parameter all clear Inverter reset Link parameter extension setting

Note: Parameters 77 and 79 are accessible for computer link operation, but they are NOT available if a FR-A5NR is used as they need the PU connector.
5-207

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

Definition of special D registers and special M coils

M8154 Offers debugging function. M8155 ON during communication, and OFF D8154 Waiting time for a response from the

inverter.
D8155 Step No. of the instruction which is

when communication is complete.

executing a function related to the inverter. Stores -1 while communication is not executed
D8156 Communication command error code.

M8156 Turns ON when a communication

error occurs. Effective only just after the EXTR instruction is executed. When the next EXTR instruction is executed, M8156 is cleared.
M8157 Turns ON when a communication

Updated when an error occurs in the EXTR instruction at the next time. Initialized to -1 by STOP RUN.
D8157 Step No. in which a communication

error occurs (latch). Reset by STOP RUN

command error has occurred (Latches the step No. which occurred for the first time after start of run.) Initialized to -1 by STOP RUN

D8154: Waiting time for response from the inverter If the inverter does not give a response within the time set here, after the PLC has transmitted a command, it is regarded as no response. When 0 is set to D8154, if the inverter does not give a response in 2 seconds, it is processed as an error. The value is set to D8154, multiplied by 0.1(s) is treated as the judgement time for no response. Use EXTR K10 (INV MON), K11 (INV CMD), K12 (RD PARAM) and K13 (WR PARAM) in accordance with the contents of read/write communication to/from the inverter. For EXTR K12/K13, the PLC automatically re-writes the link parameters in accordance with the parameter No. For parameters relating to a second parameter of the inverter, program them using the parameter No. adding by +0, +1,000 or +2,000. EXTR K10 to EXTR K13 repeatedly execute communication while the drive condition is ON. If two or more read instructions are driven at the same time, when the first is completed, next is automatically executed. The step No. being executed is stored in D8155. Communication start If communication is driven while the comms port is open, communication starts. If the drive condition turns OFF during communication, communication continues until it is completed. (The system will be adversley affected if communication is aborted by turning OFF the drive condition.) Debugging function by M8154 A standby time of 15 ms is assured after communication with the inverter is completed until next communication starts. While M8154 is ON, the standby time becomes 1,000 ms. By monitoring D8156, the user can confirm the step which is executing communication.

5-208

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.16.1.1.10 Consistency with other instructions STL instruction During communication, if the executed state is set to OFF, the communication port is not open. As a result, communication is disabled. Branch instructions CJ and CJP During communication, if the EXTR instruction is skipped by a CJ or CJP instruction, the communication port is not open. As a result, communication is disabled. Description in subroutine As the EXTR instruction requires the time of two or more operation cycles until execution is complete, it is prohibited to write a subroutine where the EXTR instruction is called twice or more in one operation cycle. Inside master control No problems are expected. FOR-NEXT It is prohibited to use an EXTR instruction together with a FOR-NEXT instruction. Description in interrupt It is prohibited to describe an EXTR instruction in any interrupt. Cautions on write during run (1) It is prohibited to rewrite the function No. of theEXTR instructions first parameter. (If the function No. is rewritten during run, a problem will occur in the same way as change in the application instruction No.) (2) It is prohibited to delete an EXTR instruction. (If the EXTR instruction is deleted during run, communication will be disabled.) Communication complete When communication is finished, the completion flag M8029 turns ON, without regard to the completion status (normal or abnormal). (M8029 turns ON for one calculation cycle at the time of completion. M8029 is used by manu instructions and therefore the ON/OFF status of M8029 is held only until the next instruction which utilizes M8029 is executed.) Communication error Communication is executed three times in total, including two retries. If communication is abnormally finished even after the third execution, it is regarded as an error. Error types are classified as follows. 1) When an error code is returned from the inverter 2) When the inverter does not give any response 3) When a response is given by an unspecified station 4) When a receive error (such as overrun, parity error and framing error) occurs 5) When M8063 turns ON and error code 6301 is set to D8067 6) When the check sum of the data returned by the inverter does not match For 1), 2) & 3) M8156 is set to ON, and an error code is set to D8156. If a communication error occurs, it is cleared when the next EXTR K10/K11/K12/K13 is executed. In general when an error occurs, M8157 turns ON and remains ON (latch) until it is set OFF.

5-209

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.16.1.1.11 Communication command error codes The table below shows values set to D8156 after EXTR K10 K13 are executed.
D8155 Contents of error Inverter operation H0000 Communication is terminated normally (no error) H0001 The inverter does not give any response H0002 Timeout error interlocking with M8129. Error occurs when transmission from the inverter is aborted H0003 An unspecified station has given a response H0004 The sum of the data returned by the inverter does not match. H0005 In parameter read/write, parameters Nos. 400 to 899 are specified but cannot be supported. Sets error code 6702 into D8067. H006 The communication port is being used for another function and therefore cannot be used for the EXTR instruction. Sets error code 6702 into D8067.

H0100 The inverter has transmitted the error code H0 - Computer NAK error. If an error occurs Communication request data includes an error beyond the permissible beyond the number of retries permissible number of retries, the H0101 The inverter has transmitted the error code H1 - Parity error. The inverter will come to contents are different from the specified parity an alarm stop H0102 The inverter has transmitted the error code H2 - Sum check error. The sum check code value in the computer is different to that of the inverter H0103 The inverter has transmitted the error code H3 - Protocol error. There is a grammar error in the data received by the inverter, data receive is not completed within the specified time, or the CR or LF is different from the parameter setting H0104 The inverter has transmitted the error code H4 - Framing error. The stop bit length is different from the default set value H0105 The inverter has transmitted the error code H5 - Overrun error. Data sent before previous receive transmission was complete. H0106 The inverter has transmitted the error code H6. Currently undefined H0107 The inverter has transmitted the error code H7 - Character error. An unused character (any character other than 0 to 9, A to F and control codes) is received H0108 The inverter has transmitted the error code H8. Currently undefined H0109 The inverter has transmitted the error code H9. Currently undefined H010A The inverter has transmitted the error code HA. This is a mode error. A The inverter does parameter write was tried while the inverter was in operation or not accept the data computer link mode was not selected. nor does it come to H010B The inverter has transmitted the error code HB -Instruction code error. an alarm stop. A non-existing instruction code is specified H010C The inverter has transmitted the error code HC -Data range error. In a parameter write, data outside the permissible setting range is specified. The inverter does not accept the data and an alarm does not occur H010D The inverter has transmitted the error code HD. Currently undefined H010E The inverter has transmitted the error code HE. Currently undefined H010F The inverter has transmitted the error code HF. Currently undefined The inverter does not accept the data nor does it come to an alarm stop.

5-210

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.16.1.1.12 Example program 1 This program reads parameters 0 to 99 in the inverter at station No. 6, to D1000 to D1099 in the PLC.
X010 SET M11

RST M11 EXTR M8029 INC K12 K6 V

D1000V

K99

RST

M11

END

5.16.1.1.13 Example program 2 This program reads parameters 0 to 99 in the inverters at station Nos. 6, 7, 8 and 9, to D1000 to D1099, D1100 to D1199, D1200 to D1299 and D1300 to D1399 respectively in the PLC.
X010 SET M11

RST

D10

RST

RST M11 EXTR M8029 INC K12 K6 V1

D1000V2

INC

D10

K99

INC

D10

RST

D10

RST

M11

END

Station No. control

V1 Parameter No. control V2 Read parameter storage destination

5-211

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.16.1.1.14 Example program 3 This program writes the speed parameter from PLC to inverter, performs forward rotation by input X1, and reverse rotation by input X2. By re-writing D10 in the peripheral equipment or the display unit, the frequency of the inverter can be changed. This program also monitors the frequency and output current in the inverter.
Program which monitors the related special devices from the personal computer

M8000 MOV D8154 D7990

MOV

D8155

D7791

Waiting time for response from inverter Step No. of instruction currently executing Error code Step in which an error has occurred for the first time

MOV M8157 MOV M8002

D8156

D7992

D8157

D7993

Writes parameters to the inverter at start

SET M10

M10 EXTR K11 K6 H0FB H0

Specifies computer link operation Maximum frequency Minimum frequency Multi-speed setting (speed 3) Multi-speed setting (speed 2) Multi-speed setting (speed 1) Acceleration time Deceleration time Clears M10 when execution is complete

EXTR

K13

K1200

EXTR

K13

K500

EXTR

K13

K5980

EXTR

K13

K4980

EXTR

K13

K3980

EXTR

K13

K10

EXTR M8029

K13

K10

RST M8002

M10

Sets the default value of the frequency

MOV K6000 D10

M8000

Re-writes the frequency

EXTR K11 K6 H0ED D10

X1: Forward, X2: Reverse

M8000

Gives commands to the inverter

EXTR K11 K6 H0FA K2X000

M8000

Monitors the inverter

EXTR K10 K6 H7A K2Y000

Monitors status Monitors frequency Monitors output current Monitors output voltage

EXTR

K10

H6F

D50

EXTR

K10

H70

D51

EXTR

K10

H71

D52

END

5-212

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.16.1.1.15 Example program 4 In the previous example, monitoring and write to the inverter are always driven. If the program changes the frequency or gives a forward/reverse rotation command, communication with the inverter may be delayed depending on the step executing communication. In the example below, when a request to write is generated, a request to read is interrupted, write is executed, then monitoring is continued again after write is completed.
Program which monitors the related special devices from the personal computer
M8000 MOV D8154 D7990

MOV

D8155

D7791

Waiting time for response from inverter Step No. of instruction currently executing Error code Step in which error has occured for the first time

MOV M8157 MOV M8002

D8156

D7992

D8157

D7993

Writes parameters to the inverter at start

SET M10 EXTR K11 K6 H0FB H0

M10

Specifies computer link operation Maximum frequency Minimum frequency Multi-speed setting (3) Multi speed setting (2) Multi speed setting (1) Acceleration time Deceleration time Clears M10 when execution complete

EXTR

K13

K1200

EXTR

K13

K500

EXTR

K13

K5980

EXTR

K13

K4980

EXTR

K13

K3980

EXTR

K13

K10

EXTR M8029

K13

K10

RST

M10

Executes write only when D10 has changed

M8002

Sets the default value of the frequency

MOV K6000 D10 D10 D7998 MOV D10 D7998

<> M8002

Withdraws to detect change Sets a request to write Writes the frequency

SET M11 EXTR M8029 RST K11 K6 H0ED

M11

D10

M11

Executes write to the inverter, only when one of X0 to X7 has changed X1: Forward, X2: Reverse
<> M8002 SET M12 EXTR M8029 RST M12 K11 K6 H0FA K2X000 M12 K2X000 D7999 MOV 2X000 D7999

Withdraws to detect change

Gives a command to the inverter

Monitors the status, only when nothing is written to the inverter

M10 M11 M12 MC N0 M50

M50 M8000 EXTR K10 K6 H7A K2Y000

Monitors the status Monitors the frequency Monitors the output current Monitors the output voltage

EXTR

K10

H6F

D50

EXTR

K10

H70

D51

EXTR

K10

H71

D52

MCR

END

5-213

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.16.1.1.16 Example program 5 Example using the STL instruction

S20 M8000 MOV K2 D100

a) b) c) d) e) f)

MOV

HFA

D101

MOV

H02

D102

EXTR M8156

K12

D100

D101

D102

g) h)

SET

S900

M8029

SET

S21

a) Specifies station No. 2 b) Instruction code for operation command c) Forward rotation command d) Transmits/receives a command to/from the inverter. e) Changes to the error processing state as an error has occurred. f) Changes to the next state as receive is normally finished. g) Receive is abnormally finished. h) Receive is complete. 5.16.1.1.17 Related Error Code Lists PLC hardware error code list (M8061, D8061) K6110
There is an abnormality in the extension ROM cassette.

Grammar error code list (M8065, D8065) K6512 The FNC 180 is described while the extension ROM cassette is not mounted.

Operation error code list (M8067, D8067) K6760 K6761 The sum of the value read by the ABS instruction does not match. When FNC185 was executed, the extension memory cassette was not mounted. Or, the firmware of the function No. specified by the first parameter does not exist in the extension memory cassette.

5-214

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

MEMO

5-215

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

Applied Instructions:

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.

FNC 00 - 09

Program Flow Move And Compare

5-4 5-16

FNC 10 - 19

FNC 20 - 29

Arithmetic And Logical Operations (+, -, , )

5-24

FNC 30 - 39

5-34 5-42 5-52 5-66 5-80 5-94 5-110 5-118 5-122 5-126 5-136 5-146 5-146 5-150

FNC 40 - 49

FNC 50 - 59

FNC 60 - 69

FNC 70 - 79

FNC 80 - 89

FNC 110-129

FNC 130-139

FNC 140-149

FNC 150-159

FNC 160-169

FNC 170-179

FNC 180-189

17.

FNC 220-249

5-216

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.17

Inline Comparisons - FNC 220 to FNC 249

Contents: Page LDr ANDr ORr LoaD compare AND compare OR compare FNC 224 to 230 FNC 232 to 238 FNC 240 to 246 5-151 5-152 5-153

Symbols list: D - Destination device. S - Source device. m, n- Number of active devices, bits or an operational constant. Additional numeric suffixes will be attached if there are more than one operand with the same function e.g. D1, S3 or for lists/tabled devices D3+0, S+9 etc. MSB - Most Significant Bit, sometimes used to indicate the mathematical sign of a number, i.e. positive = 0, and negative = 1. LSB - Least Significant Bit. Instruction modifications: PPP PPPP DPPP DPPP An instruction operating in 16 bit mode, where PPP identifies the instruction mnemonic. A 16 bit mode instruction modified to use pulse (single) operation. An instruction modified to operate in 32 bit operation. A 32 bit mode instruction modified to use pulse (single) operation.

- A repetitive instruction which will change the destination value on every scan unless
modified by the pulse function.

- An operand which cannot be indexed, i.e. The addition of V or Z is either invalid or will
have no effect to the value of the operand.

5-217

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.17.1

LD compare (FNC 224 to 230)

Operands S K,H, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic LDr (LoaD compare) where r is =, >, <, <>, ,

Function Initial comparison contact. Active when the comparison S1 r S2 is true.

D K,H, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z

Program steps LDr: 5 steps DLDr: 9 steps

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

[ S1 ] LD = LD > K200 D200

[ S2 ] C10 K-30 X001 SET Y010 Y011 M50

LD > K678493 C200 M3

Operation: The value of S 1 and S 2 are tested according to the comparison of the instruction. If the comparison is true then the LD contact is active. If the comparison is false then the LD contact is not active. Points to note: The LD comparison functions can be placed anywhere in a program that a standard LD instruction can be placed. I.e., it always starts a new block. (See page 2-3 for LD instruction)
FNC No. 224 225 226 228 229 230 Mnemonic 16 bit LD = LD > LD < LD <> LD LD 32 bit DLD = DLD > DLD < DLD <> DLD DLD Active when S1 = S2 S1 > S2 S1 < S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 Inactive when S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 = S2 S1 > S2 S1 < S2

5-218

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.17.2

AND compare (FNC 232 to 238)

Operands S

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic ANDr (AND compare) where r is =, >, <, <>, ,

Function

D K,H, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z

Program steps ANDr: 5 steps DANDr: 9 steps

Serial comparison K,H, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z contact. Active when the comparison S1 r S2 is true.

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

X000 X001 X002 M3

[ S1 ] AND = K200 AND > K-10

[ S2 ] C10 D0 SET Y010 Y011 M50

DAND> K678493 D10

Operation: The value of S 1 and S 2 are tested according to the comparison of the instruction. If the comparison is true then the AND contact is active. If the comparison is false then the AND contact is not active. Points to note: The AND comparison functions can be placed anywhere in a program that a standard AND instruction can be placed. i.e., it is a serial connection contact.

(See page 2-6 for AND instruction)

FNC No. 232 233 234 236 237 238 Mnemonic 16 bit AND = AND > AND < AND <> AND AND 32 bit DAND = DAND > DAND < DAND <> DAND DAND Active when S1 = S2 S1 > S2 S1 < S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 Inactive when S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 = S2 S1 > S2 S1 < S2

5-219

FX Series Programmable Controlers

Applied Instructions 5

5.17.3

OR compare (FNC 240 to 246)

Operands S K,H, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX2NC

Mnemonic ORr (OR compare) where r is =, >, <, <>, ,

Function Parallel comparison contact. Active when the comparison S1 r S2 is true.

D K,H, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D, V, Z

Program steps ORr: 5 steps DORr: 9 steps

16 BIT OPERATION

32 BIT OPERATION

PULSE-P

X001 [ S1 ] OR = X002 OR [ S2 ] K200 C10 M30 D100 K100000

Y000

M60

Operation: The value of S 1 and S 2 are tested according to the comparison of the instruction. If the comparison is true then the OR contact is active. If the comparison is false then the OR contact is not active. Points to note: The OR comparison functions can be placed anywhere in a program that a standard OR instruction can be placed. i.e., it is a parallel connection contact.

(See page 2-7 for OR instruction)

FNC No. 240 241 242 244 245 246 Mnemonic 16 bit OR = OR > OR < OR <> OR OR 32 bit DOR = DOR > DOR < DOR <> DOR DOR Active when S1 = S2 S1 > S2 S1 < S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 Inactive when S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 = S2 S1 > S2 S1 < S2

5-220